understanding warning areas

Transcription

understanding warning areas
Thunderstorm Warning System
TWX300
USER ’S GUIDE
Version 5.0
January 2014
M210815EN-C
PUBLISHED BY
Vaisala Oyj
P.O. Box 26
FIN-00421 Helsinki
Finland
Tel.
Fax
+358 9 8949 1
+358 9 8949 2227
Visit our Internet pages at http://www.vaisala.com/
FOR TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Vaisala Inc.
Tucson Operations
2705 E. Medina Rd.
Tucson, AZ 85706-7155
USA
Tel.
+011 520 806 7300
Fax:
+011 520 741 2848
Toll free (US) +1 888 424 9899
© Vaisala 2014
No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means, electronic
or mechanical (including photocopying), nor may its contents be communicated to
a third party without prior written permission of the copyright holder.
The contents are subject to change without prior notice.
Please observe that this manual does not create any legally binding obligations for
Vaisala towards the customer or end user. All legally binding commitments and
agreements are included exclusively in the applicable supply contract or
Conditions of Sale.
________________________________________________________________________________
Table of Contents
Chapter 1
GENERAL INFORMATION .................................................................................................................. 21
About This Manual.................................................................................................................... 21
Contents of This Manual................................................................................................... 21
Document Conventions .................................................................................................... 23
Safety ......................................................................................................................................... 23
General Safety Considerations......................................................................................... 23
.................................................................................................................................................... 24
Trademarks ............................................................................................................................... 24
License Agreement................................................................................................................... 24
Warranty .................................................................................................................................... 25
Technical Support .................................................................................................................... 25
Chapter 2
TWX300 OVERVIEW............................................................................................................................ 27
Display Modes........................................................................................................................... 28
Supported Data Types.............................................................................................................. 29
Processing Tasks ..................................................................................................................... 29
Display Tasks............................................................................................................................ 29
Using Anti-Virus Software ....................................................................................................... 30
Using Screen Savers ................................................................................................................ 30
Displaying Version Information............................................................................................... 30
Displaying TWX300 Legal Notices .......................................................................................... 31
Copyright Notice....................................................................................................................... 32
XviD Codec Copyright Notice ........................................................................................... 32
Getting Technical Support....................................................................................................... 33
Using Context-Sensitive, or "What’s This" Help ................................................................... 33
Using Task-Oriented Help—Main Help File ............................................................................ 33
Printing the Help File ........................................................................................................ 34
Using Links in Help........................................................................................................... 34
Changing Help Font Size.................................................................................................. 34
Adding a Custom Logo ............................................................................................................ 34
Add Custom Logo to Main Screen.................................................................................... 34
Add Custom Logo to Generated Images .......................................................................... 34
Add Custom Logo to Printed Maps................................................................................... 35
Chapter 3
UNDERSTANDING THE TWX300 INTERFACE.................................................................................. 37
VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 3
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Desktop Icon ............................................................................................................................. 37
TWX300 Application Launcher ................................................................................................ 37
Main Application Button....................................................................................................39
Exiting TWX300......................................................................................................39
Diagnostic Replay Button .................................................................................................40
Central Data File Viewer Button .......................................................................................42
EFM Data File Viewer Button ...........................................................................................43
Using the File Viewer .............................................................................................43
Quitting the Function ..............................................................................................44
Alarm File Viewer Button ..................................................................................................45
Using the File Viewer .............................................................................................45
Selecting a File by Date .........................................................................................46
Navigating the Graph Window................................................................................47
Zoom In .............................................................................................................47
Reset Default View............................................................................................47
Timeline..................................................................................................................47
Moving the Timeline ..........................................................................................47
Hide the Timeline ..............................................................................................48
Quitting the Function ..............................................................................................48
Configuration File Viewer Button ......................................................................................49
Using the File Viewer .............................................................................................49
Saving and Renaming a File ..................................................................................50
Printing the File ......................................................................................................50
Quitting the Function ..............................................................................................50
TWXS1200 Central Data File Converter Button ...............................................................51
Using the Data Converter.......................................................................................51
Removing a File Before Conversion.......................................................................53
Starting and Stopping TWX300 ............................................................................................... 54
Start ..................................................................................................................................54
Stop ..................................................................................................................................54
Understanding Main Menu Items ............................................................................................ 55
File Menu Items ................................................................................................................55
View Menu Items ..............................................................................................................56
Tools Menu Items .............................................................................................................58
Replay Menu Items...........................................................................................................60
Help Menu Items ..............................................................................................................61
Understanding Toolbar Items .................................................................................................. 62
Understanding the Status Bar ................................................................................................. 64
Standard Replay Mode.....................................................................................................64
HotKey Replay Mode........................................................................................................65
Understanding the Alarms Dialog Box ................................................................................... 66
Displaying the Alarms Dialog Box ....................................................................................67
Using the Warning Areas Tab ..........................................................................................68
Displaying the Warning Areas Tab.........................................................................68
Using the EFMs Tab.........................................................................................................71
Displaying the EFMs Tab .......................................................................................71
Using the RADS Equations Tab .......................................................................................74
Displaying the RADS Equations Tab......................................................................74
Using the Relays Equations Tab ......................................................................................76
Displaying the Relay Equations Tab ......................................................................76
Using the Relay Options Tab............................................................................................78
4 ___________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
________________________________________________________________________________
Displaying the Relay Options Tab .......................................................................... 78
Using the Email Equations Tab ........................................................................................ 80
Displaying the Email Equations Tab....................................................................... 80
Understanding the General Configuration Dialog Box ......................................................... 82
Displaying the General Configuration Dialog Box ............................................................ 82
Using the General Tab ..................................................................................................... 84
Displaying the General Tab.................................................................................... 84
Using the Connections Tab .............................................................................................. 87
Displaying the Connections Tab............................................................................. 87
Using the Density Tab ...................................................................................................... 91
Displaying the Density Tab..................................................................................... 91
Using the Identify Tab ...................................................................................................... 94
Displaying the Identify Tab ..................................................................................... 94
Using the Others Tab ....................................................................................................... 96
Displaying the Others Tab...................................................................................... 96
Lat and Lon Boxes—DMS Option ........................................................................................... 99
Understanding Inspector ....................................................................................................... 100
Displaying the Inspector Dialog Box............................................................................... 100
Defining Inspector Window Parameters ......................................................................... 101
No Lightning Found by Inspector—Message ................................................................. 102
Understanding the Map Legend ............................................................................................ 103
Map Legend Display Modes ........................................................................................... 104
Enabling Density Display Mode............................................................................ 104
Enabling Discharges Display Mode...................................................................... 105
Displaying the Map Legend ............................................................................................ 106
Expanding the Legend Dialog Box ................................................................................. 107
Contracting the Legend Dialog Box................................................................................ 107
Changing Map Legend Colors........................................................................................ 108
Defining Custom Map Legend Colors .................................................................. 108
Understanding the Monitor Window ..................................................................................... 109
Displaying the Monitor Window ...................................................................................... 110
Understanding the Time-Lapse Histogram .......................................................................... 110
Displaying the Time-Lapse Histogram............................................................................ 111
Relocating the Histogram ............................................................................................... 111
View Histogram Data as a Line Graph ........................................................................... 112
Using the Information Window.............................................................................................. 112
Viewing Messages.......................................................................................................... 113
Translucent Information Window .................................................................................... 113
Chapter 4
TWX300 AREA MAP.......................................................................................................................... 115
Understanding the Area Map................................................................................................. 115
Map Features ................................................................................................................. 116
Changing the Area Map ................................................................................................. 116
Map Grid Lines ............................................................................................................... 116
Displaying the Map Grid ....................................................................................... 118
Map Scale Bar ................................................................................................................ 118
Displaying the Map Scale Bar .............................................................................. 118
Understanding Map Layers.................................................................................................... 119
Map Layers..................................................................................................................... 119
VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 5
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Using the Layer Control Dialog Box ...............................................................................120
Displaying the Layer Control Dialog Box..............................................................121
Managing Map Layers and Properties............................................................................122
Map Layer Order ............................................................................................................123
Reorder Map Layers.............................................................................................124
Map Layer Properties .....................................................................................................125
Accessing the Display Properties Dialog Box ......................................................126
Map Label Properties .....................................................................................................127
Navigating the Area Map ........................................................................................................ 128
Map Navigator ................................................................................................................128
Previous View......................................................................................................130
Full Screen Mode .................................................................................................130
Zooming and Panning ....................................................................................................131
Zooming to the Extents (Data Limits) of the Subscribed Data Region .................131
Zooming In On Displayed Data ............................................................................131
Zooming Out on Displayed Data ..........................................................................132
Panning the Area Map..........................................................................................132
Projections and Geosets........................................................................................................ 133
Map Projections..............................................................................................................133
Displaying the Choose Projection Dialog Box ......................................................133
Changing the Default Map Projection...................................................................133
Map Geosets ..................................................................................................................134
Changing the Default Map Geoset .......................................................................135
Chapter 5
UNDERSTANDING WARNING AREAS ............................................................................................137
Creating Warning Areas......................................................................................................... 139
Circular Warning Area with Known Coordinates ............................................................141
Circular Warning Area with Unknown Coordinates ........................................................143
Circular Warning Area–Manually Placed ........................................................................146
Concentric Warning Area ...............................................................................................148
Warning Area Using a Polygon ......................................................................................151
Defining Warning Area Styles ............................................................................................... 153
Displaying the Region Style Dialog Box .........................................................................153
Defining a Warning Area Style .......................................................................................153
Enabling and Displaying a Warning Area............................................................................. 155
Displaying Multiple Warning Areas.................................................................................155
Modifying a Warning Area ..................................................................................................... 156
Combining Warning Areas..............................................................................................158
Removing a Warning Area .............................................................................................159
Renaming a Warning Area .............................................................................................160
Determining Warning Area Properties.................................................................................. 160
Chapter 6
USING ELECTRIC FIELD MILL DATA ..............................................................................................163
Alerts and Alarms ................................................................................................................... 163
EFM Status Window ............................................................................................................... 163
Displaying the EFM Status Window ...............................................................................164
Alert State.......................................................................................................................164
6 ___________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
________________________________________________________________________________
EFM Graph Window................................................................................................................ 165
Features ......................................................................................................................... 166
Displaying the EFM Graph Window................................................................................ 166
Navigating the EFM Graph Window ............................................................................... 166
EFM Commands...................................................................................................................... 167
Displaying the EFM Command and Control Dialog Box................................................. 167
Sending EFM Commands .............................................................................................. 169
Chapter 7
USING RADS AND RELAYS ............................................................................................................. 171
Working With RADS ............................................................................................................... 171
RADS Status .................................................................................................................. 172
Displaying the RADS and Relays Status Window................................................ 172
Closing the RADS and Relays Status Window .................................................... 172
Alarm Equation for RADS............................................................................................... 173
Creating the RADS Equation................................................................................ 175
Working With Relays .............................................................................................................. 176
Relays Status ................................................................................................................. 176
Displaying the RADS and Relays Status Window................................................ 176
Closing the RADS and Relays Status Window .................................................... 176
Alarm Equations for Relays ............................................................................................ 176
Creating the Relay Equation ................................................................................ 178
Determining Current Start Up and Trigger States .............................................................. 179
Configuring a Relay State............................................................................................... 180
Time Range Options ............................................................................................ 181
Chapter 8
UNDERSTANDING ALERT STATUS ................................................................................................ 183
Managing Alerts...................................................................................................................... 184
Displaying the Alerts Status Window.............................................................................. 184
Determining Current Alerts Status.................................................................................. 185
Acknowledge an Alert..................................................................................................... 185
Configuring Alert Conditions ................................................................................................ 187
Warning Areas................................................................................................................ 187
EFM ................................................................................................................................ 189
Chapter 9
VIEWING LIGHTNING DATA............................................................................................................. 191
Data and Warning Area Limits............................................................................................... 191
Data Limits ..................................................................................................................... 191
Warning Limits................................................................................................................ 191
Discharge Types ..................................................................................................................... 192
Displaying the Discharge Types Dialog Box................................................................... 193
Displaying a Specific Discharge Type ............................................................................ 193
Event Display—Appearance ................................................................................ 194
Display and Event Coordinates............................................................................................. 195
Determining the Center Coordinate of the Current Display Area ................................... 195
Determining the Coordinates of an Event....................................................................... 196
Determining the Current Cursor Position (Latitude and Longitude)................................ 197
VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 7
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Viewing Event Specifics......................................................................................................... 198
Event Date and Time......................................................................................................198
Determining the Distance and Bearing to an Event........................................................199
Distance Line—Changing Color ...........................................................................200
Determining the Intensity of an Event.............................................................................201
Using Inspector to Determine Event Intensity ......................................................201
Using Proportional Symbols (Fonts) to Determine Event Intensity ......................202
Displaying Proportional Symbols (Fonts) .............................................................203
Disabling Proportional Symbols ...........................................................................203
Highlighting the Last (New) Event ........................................................................................ 204
Enabling the Last Event Feature ....................................................................................204
Determining the Polarity of an Event .................................................................................... 206
Determining Total Lightning Counts .................................................................................... 207
Total Lightning Counts Using the Status Bar .......................................................207
Total Lightning Counts Using the Monitor Window ..............................................207
Viewing Event Information Using Inspector ........................................................................ 208
No Lightning Found by Inspector....................................................................................209
Using Map Legend Color Keys .............................................................................................. 209
Displaying Solid Colors for Lightning Data Display ........................................................209
Displaying Gradient Colors for Lightning Data Display...................................................210
Determining the Distance Between Objects ........................................................................ 211
Printing the Display Area ....................................................................................................... 212
Using Predefined Viewing Levels ......................................................................................... 213
Displaying the Predefined Zooms Dialog Box ................................................................213
Adding a Predefined Zoom.............................................................................................213
Removing a Predefined Zoom........................................................................................214
Selecting a Saved Predefined Zoom Level for Viewing..................................................215
Configuring a Specific Predefined Zoom Sequence.......................................................215
Length of Time a Predefined Zoom is Displayed............................................................217
Image Synchronization—Display and Predefined Zooms ..............................................218
Auto-Cycle Predefined Zooms........................................................................................218
Enabling Auto-Cycle Mode...................................................................................218
Disabling Auto-Cycle Mode ..................................................................................218
Creating and Saving Image Files .......................................................................................... 219
Automatically Saving an Image—Periodically ................................................................219
Manually Saving an Image File ......................................................................................221
Image Filenames—Format .............................................................................................222
Chapter 10
QUERYING LIGHTNING DATA .........................................................................................................225
Default Date and Time....................................................................................................225
Query Specific Lightning Data .............................................................................................. 226
Intra-cloud (IC) Data ............................................................................................................... 227
Understanding Initiation Points ............................................................................................ 229
Understanding Discrimination Values.................................................................................. 230
IC Node Breakdown .......................................................................................................231
8 ___________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
________________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 11
REPLAYING TWX300 LIGHTNING DATA ........................................................................................ 233
RADS and Relays During Replay .......................................................................................... 234
TWX300 Video Configuration ................................................................................................ 235
Accessing the Setup Screen .......................................................................................... 235
Basic Configuration ........................................................................................................ 236
High Quality Video ............................................................................................... 237
Standard Replay ..................................................................................................................... 238
Displaying the Replay Dialog Box .................................................................................. 238
Minimizing the Replay Dialog Box........................................................................ 240
Maximizing the Replay Dialog Box....................................................................... 240
Closing the Replay Dialog Box............................................................................. 240
Setting Replay Speed..................................................................................................... 240
Replaying a Data Video .......................................................................................................... 241
Loading a Specific Data File for Replay ......................................................................... 242
Live Replay.............................................................................................................................. 243
Starting Live Replay ....................................................................................................... 243
Hotkey Replay ......................................................................................................................... 244
Using HotKeys................................................................................................................ 245
HotKey Replay Frame Rates................................................................................ 245
Building a Data Video for Replay .......................................................................................... 246
Displaying the Build Video Dialog Box ........................................................................... 246
Building a Data Video ..................................................................................................... 247
Stopping the Recording Session .................................................................................... 248
Diagnostic Replay................................................................................................................... 249
RADS and Relay Actions................................................................................................ 250
Speed Intervals .............................................................................................................. 251
Diagnostic Replay Actions.............................................................................................. 251
Chapter 12
TWX300 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION............................................................................................... 253
Determining Your Licensed Data Region ............................................................................. 253
Understanding the License File ............................................................................................ 253
Viewing Your Licensed Options...................................................................................... 254
Using Password Protection ................................................................................................... 255
Password-Protected Functions....................................................................................... 255
Entering a Password ............................................................................................ 256
Changing the Password ....................................................................................... 256
Understanding System Messages and Bulletins................................................................. 257
Locating System Bulletins .............................................................................................. 257
Viewing System Bulletins and Messages ....................................................................... 257
Understanding TWX300 Display Modes ............................................................................... 258
Discharges Mode............................................................................................................ 258
Density Mode ................................................................................................................. 259
Selecting a Display Mode..................................................................................... 260
Understanding TWX300 Time—UTC ..................................................................................... 261
Time and Discharges...................................................................................................... 261
PC Clock Adjustment...................................................................................................... 261
VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________ 9
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Inconsistent Event Dates................................................................................................262
Using TWX300 System Fonts ................................................................................................ 262
Using Proportional Fonts....................................................................................................... 263
Configuring Proportional Fonts.......................................................................................264
Understanding TWX300 System Files .................................................................................. 266
System Archives.............................................................................................................266
Alarm Archive .......................................................................................................267
Central Archive—(CEN) .......................................................................................267
Density Archive ....................................................................................................267
EFM Archive—(EFMx) .........................................................................................268
Locating and Viewing Archived ALARM Text Files ........................................................268
Locating and Viewing TWX300 Log Files.......................................................................270
Locating and Viewing TWX300 Archive Files.................................................................270
Backing Up Files..................................................................................................................... 271
Locating Backup Directories...........................................................................................271
Backing Up Lightning Data Files ....................................................................................272
Understanding Configuration Files....................................................................................... 273
Locating Configuration Files ...........................................................................................273
File Parameters ..............................................................................................................273
Configuration File—Maintained Parameter Items...........................................................274
Central Connection Parameters ...........................................................................274
Archive Parameters..............................................................................................274
Map Parameters...................................................................................................275
"Clear" Warning Area Style Parameters...............................................................275
"In Alert" Warning Area Style Parameters ............................................................275
Display Data Parameters .....................................................................................275
Warning Area Alert Parameters ...........................................................................276
Warning Area Parameters....................................................................................276
EFM Alert Parameters..........................................................................................276
Predefined Zoom Parameters ..............................................................................276
Additional Parameters ..........................................................................................277
Using Multiple Configuration Files ..................................................................................277
Determining the Current Configuration File ..........................................................278
Saving a Configuration File ..................................................................................278
Loading a Saved Configuration File .....................................................................279
Chapter 13
TWX300 COMMUNICATIONS ...........................................................................................................281
TWX300 Data Exchange ......................................................................................................... 281
Central Data ...................................................................................................................281
EFM Data .......................................................................................................................282
Data Out ...............................................................................................................282
Connection Configuration ..................................................................................................... 282
Central Data Connection ................................................................................................282
EFM Connection.............................................................................................................283
RADS Connection ..........................................................................................................284
Relays Connection .........................................................................................................285
Email Notification Connection.........................................................................................286
Determining Communications Status................................................................................... 287
Status Detail ...................................................................................................................287
10 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
________________________________________________________________________________
Status Messages ............................................................................................................ 288
Socket Connections ............................................................................................. 288
Enabled Devices .................................................................................................. 288
Socket Connections ............................................................................................. 289
Enabled Devices .................................................................................................. 289
Configuring Email Notification .............................................................................................. 290
Adding an Address to the Notification List...................................................................... 290
Defining Time Notification Periods ....................................................................... 292
Removing an Email Address .......................................................................................... 293
Renaming an Email Address .......................................................................................... 293
Testing an Email Address Used By the System .................................................................. 294
Appendix A
INSPECTOR PARAMETERS............................................................................................................. 297
Appendix B
COMMONLY USED MAP PROJECTIONS........................................................................................ 301
Mercator Projection ........................................................................................................ 302
Regional Equal-Area Projections.................................................................................... 303
UTM (WGS84) Projection............................................................................................... 305
US State Plane Projection .............................................................................................. 307
Appendix C
DATA AGING ..................................................................................................................................... 309
Time-Period Length ........................................................................................................ 309
Map Legend Color Keys......................................................................................................... 310
Setting a Time-Period Length for Data Aging ...................................................................... 314
Interaction of Map Legend Colors and Replay .................................................................... 315
Data Aging...................................................................................................................... 315
Map Legend Colors and Replay ..................................................................................... 315
Appendix D
CREATING AND TESTING LOGICAL EXPRESSIONS.................................................................... 317
Creating Alarm Conditions .................................................................................................... 317
Alarm Requirements....................................................................................................... 317
Understanding Logical Expressions .................................................................................... 317
Operators ....................................................................................................................... 318
Parenthesis ................................................................................................................... 318
Creating Logical Expressions ............................................................................................... 319
Testing an Alarm Equation .................................................................................................... 321
Test RADS and Relay Alarms Function ......................................................................... 321
Alerts During Testing............................................................................................ 321
Displaying the Test RADS and Relays Dialog Box .............................................. 322
Appendix E
USING THE VAISALA LIGHTNING DATA SERVER ........................................................................ 325
ASCII Output ........................................................................................................................... 325
VAISALA ________________________________________________________________________11
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Determining Your Licensed ASCII Output Region..........................................................325
Configuring TWX300 for ASCII Output...........................................................................326
Verifying ASCII Output ...................................................................................................327
Using the Vaisala Data Server ............................................................................................... 328
Displaying the VLDS Window.........................................................................................328
Displaying the VLDS Configuration Dialog Box..............................................................329
Displaying VLDS Version Information ............................................................................331
Appendix F
INTRODUCTION TO LIGHTNING DETECTION ................................................................................333
Lightning Phenomena ............................................................................................................ 333
Anatomy of a CG Lightning Flash...................................................................................333
Radio Frequency Characteristics of Lightning................................................................334
Uses of Lightning Data ...................................................................................................336
LF/VLF Lightning Location Methods .................................................................................... 337
A Brief History.................................................................................................................337
Basic Direction Finding...................................................................................................338
Basic Time-of-Arrival ......................................................................................................339
Improved Accuracy from Combined Technology............................................................341
Stroke Peak Current .......................................................................................................343
VHF Detection ......................................................................................................................... 344
Direction Finding Based on VHF Interferometry.............................................................344
Wide Baseline TOA Methods Operating at VHF ............................................................345
VHF Signal Strength.......................................................................................................346
Lightning Location System Performance............................................................................. 346
Measurement of Location Accuracy ...............................................................................346
Data Consistency ...........................................................................................................348
Detection Efficiency ........................................................................................................349
Use of Location Quality Indicators ....................................................................................... 349
References .............................................................................................................................. 350
Appendix G
GLOSSARY........................................................................................................................................353
INDEX .................................................................................................................................................361
12 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
________________________________________________________________________________
Table of Figures
Figure 1
Figure 2
Figure 3
Figure 1
Figure 4
Figure 5
Figure 6
Figure 7
Figure 8
Figure 9
Figure 10
Figure 11
Figure 12
Figure 13
Figure 14
Figure 15
Figure 16
Figure 17
Figure 18
Figure 19
Figure 20
Figure 21
Figure 22
Figure 23
Figure 24
Figure 25
Figure 26
Figure 27
Figure 28
Figure 29
Figure 30
Figure 31
Figure 32
Figure 33
Figure 34
Figure 35
Figure 36
Figure 37
Figure 37
Figure 38
Figure 39
Figure 40
Figure 41
Figure 42
Figure 43
Figure 44
TWX300 Display .............................................................................................................. 27
Displaying Version Information ........................................................................................ 31
Displaying the Legal Notice.............................................................................................. 31
TWX300 Application Launcher......................................................................................... 38
TWX300 Display .............................................................................................................. 39
Diagnostic Replay—Example 1........................................................................................ 40
Diagnostic Replay—Example 2........................................................................................ 41
Central Data File Viewer .................................................................................................. 42
EFM File Viewer............................................................................................................... 43
Alarm File Viewer ............................................................................................................. 45
File Viewer Calendar........................................................................................................ 47
Viewing an Alarm File ...................................................................................................... 48
Configuration File Viewer ................................................................................................. 49
Data File Converter .......................................................................................................... 51
TWX300 Main Menu ........................................................................................................ 55
TWX300 Toolbar .............................................................................................................. 62
TWX300 Diagnostic Replay Toolbar ................................................................................ 63
TWX300 Status Bar ......................................................................................................... 64
TWX300 Status Bar—Standard Replay Mode ................................................................. 64
TWX300 Status Bar—HotKey Replay Mode.................................................................... 65
Alarms Dialog Box............................................................................................................ 66
Warning Areas Tab .......................................................................................................... 68
EFMs Tab......................................................................................................................... 71
RADS Equations Tab ....................................................................................................... 74
Relay Equations Tab........................................................................................................ 76
Relay Options Tab ........................................................................................................... 78
Email Equations Tab ........................................................................................................ 80
General Configuration Dialog Box.................................................................................... 82
General Tab ..................................................................................................................... 84
Connections Tab .............................................................................................................. 88
Density Tab ...................................................................................................................... 92
Identify Tab ...................................................................................................................... 94
Others Tab ....................................................................................................................... 96
Coordinate in DMS Option ............................................................................................... 99
Inspector Dialog Box ...................................................................................................... 100
Nothing Found by Inspector—Message......................................................................... 102
Legend Dialog Box......................................................................................................... 103
Map Legend—Density Mode.......................................................................................... 104
Map Legend—Density Mode.......................................................................................... 104
Map Legend—Discharges Mode.................................................................................... 105
Legend Dialog Box—Expanded and Contracted ........................................................... 107
Map Legend Color Keys................................................................................................. 108
Monitor Window ............................................................................................................. 109
TWX300 Time-Lapse Histogram.................................................................................... 110
Changing Histogram Position......................................................................................... 111
Viewing a Line Graph of Histogram Data....................................................................... 112
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 13
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Figure 45
Figure 46
Figure 47
Figure 48
Figure 49
Figure 50
Figure 51
Figure 52
Figure 53
Figure 54
Figure 55
Figure 56
Figure 57
Figure 58
Figure 59
Figure 60
Figure 61
Figure 62
Figure 63
Figure 64
Figure 65
Figure 66
Figure 67
Figure 68
Figure 69
Figure 70
Figure 71
Figure 72
Figure 73
Figure 74
Figure 75
Figure 76
Figure 77
Figure 78
Figure 79
Figure 80
Figure 81
Figure 82
Figure 83
Figure 84
Figure 85
Figure 86
Figure 87
Figure 88
Figure 89
Figure 90
Figure 91
Figure 92
Figure 93
Figure 94
Figure 95
Figure 96
Figure 97
Information Window........................................................................................................ 112
Information Window—Message ..................................................................................... 113
Information Window—Translucent ................................................................................. 113
Map Grid Displayed Over the Area Map ........................................................................ 117
Map Scale Bar................................................................................................................ 118
Typical Area Map—Washington D.C Area ..................................................................... 119
Layer Control Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 120
Display Properties Dialog Box........................................................................................ 126
Label Properties Dialog Box........................................................................................... 127
Using the Map Navigator—Example .............................................................................. 128
Map Navigator Options................................................................................................... 128
Using Map Navigator...................................................................................................... 129
Changing the View ......................................................................................................... 129
Map Navigator—Zoomed Out Maximum........................................................................ 130
Choose Projection Dialog Box........................................................................................ 134
Geoset Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 135
Example Warning Areas—Six WAs Displayed............................................................... 137
Example Warning Areas—Close-Up of WA in Alert ....................................................... 138
Area Definition Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 140
Creating a Circular Warning Area—Known Coordinates ............................................... 143
Creating a Circular Warning Area—Unknown Coordinates ........................................... 145
Manually-Placed Circular Warning Area ........................................................................ 147
Concentric Warning Areas—Outside Ring is In Alert ..................................................... 150
Two Polygon-Shaped Warning Areas—One is In Alert.................................................. 152
Region Style Dialog Box—In Alert and Clear Modes ..................................................... 154
Enabling a Selected Warning Area ................................................................................ 155
Combining Warning Areas ............................................................................................. 159
Determining Warning Area Properties............................................................................ 161
EFM Status Window....................................................................................................... 164
EFM Status Window—Alert State .................................................................................. 164
EFM Graph Window ....................................................................................................... 165
EFM Graph—Normal View............................................................................................. 166
EFM Graph—Zoomed In ................................................................................................ 167
EFM Commands Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 168
Determining RADS Status—Examples .......................................................................... 172
Alarms Dialog Box.......................................................................................................... 173
RADS Equations Tab ..................................................................................................... 174
Create Equation for RADS ............................................................................................. 175
RADS Equation—Example............................................................................................. 175
Determining RADS Status—Examples .......................................................................... 176
Relay Equations Tab ...................................................................................................... 177
Create Equation for Relays ............................................................................................ 178
Relay Equation—Example ............................................................................................. 178
Determining Relay Status............................................................................................... 179
Relay Options Tab.......................................................................................................... 180
Defining Relay Time Ranges.......................................................................................... 181
Events Trigger an Alert................................................................................................... 183
Alert Status Window ....................................................................................................... 183
Alerts Status Dialog Box................................................................................................. 184
Alerts Status Window—In Alert Mode ............................................................................ 186
Configuring an Alarm—Warning Areas .......................................................................... 187
Configuring an Alarm—EFMs......................................................................................... 189
Discharge Types Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 193
14 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 98
Figure 99
Figure 100
Figure 101
Figure 102
Figure 103
Figure 104
Figure 105
Figure 106
Figure 107
Figure 108
Figure 109
Figure 110
Figure 111
Figure 112
Figure 113
Figure 114
Figure 115
Figure 116
Figure 117
Figure 118
Figure 119
Figure 120
Figure 121
Figure 122
Figure 123
Figure 124
Figure 125
Figure 126
Figure 127
Figure 128
Figure 129
Figure 130
Figure 131
Figure 132
Figure 133
Figure 134
Figure 135
Figure 136
Figure 137
Figure 138
Figure 139
Figure 140
Figure 141
Figure 142
Figure 143
Figure 144
Figure 145
Figure 146
Figure 147
Figure 148
Figure 149
Figure 150
Displaying Events........................................................................................................... 194
Center Coordinates of the Display ................................................................................. 195
Selecting an Event ......................................................................................................... 196
Obtaining Event Coordinates Using Inspector ............................................................... 196
Obtaining Event Coordinates Using the Status Bar ....................................................... 197
Determining Current Cursor Coordinates....................................................................... 197
Using Inspector to View Event Date and Time............................................................... 198
Determining Distance and Bearing ................................................................................ 199
Determining the Intensity of an Event Using Inspector .................................................. 201
Proportional Font Intensity—Range Categories............................................................. 202
Displaying Proportional Fonts ........................................................................................ 203
Proportional Symbols Used in Determining Event Intensity........................................... 204
Using the New Event Symbol......................................................................................... 205
Last Event Highlighted ................................................................................................... 205
Determining Lightning Polarity ....................................................................................... 206
Determining Total Lightning Counts Using the Status Bar............................................. 207
Determining Total Lightning Counts Using Monitor........................................................ 207
Viewing Event Information Using Inspector ................................................................... 208
Nothing Found Message—Inspector.............................................................................. 209
Color Key Colors—Solid ................................................................................................ 209
Color Key Colors—Gradient........................................................................................... 210
Predefined Zooms Dialog Box ....................................................................................... 213
Zoom Dialog Box............................................................................................................ 214
Creating a Specific Zoom Sequence.............................................................................. 216
Predefined Zooms—Auto-Cycle Mode........................................................................... 218
Automatic Image Save Panel......................................................................................... 220
Save Image Path Entry .................................................................................................. 220
Save Image Dialog Box.................................................................................................. 221
Saved Image—Example ................................................................................................ 222
Query Data Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 225
Query Lightning Data Results ........................................................................................ 226
Intra-Cloud Lightning Over the Area Map—Close Up .................................................... 227
IC Data Displayed Over an Area Map With Inspector.................................................... 228
Initiation Points Displayed Over the Area Map—Close Up ............................................ 229
IC Data Displayed Over the Area Map—Close Up ........................................................ 230
IC Node Breakdown ....................................................................................................... 231
RADS and Relays During Diagnostic Replay................................................................. 234
Properly Selecting TWX300 Video Options ................................................................... 235
Configuring the Video Encoder ...................................................................................... 236
Defining High Quality Video Output ............................................................................... 237
Replay Dialog Box.......................................................................................................... 239
Replay Speed................................................................................................................. 241
Replay—Selecting a Beginning Date ............................................................................. 242
Displaying the Build Video Dialog Box ........................................................................... 246
Diagnostic Replay Display ............................................................................................. 250
Determining Your Licensed Data Region....................................................................... 253
Entering a Password ...................................................................................................... 255
Viewing System Messages and Bulletins....................................................................... 257
TWX300—Discharges Mode.......................................................................................... 259
TWX300—Density Mode................................................................................................ 260
Inconsistent Event Date Message.................................................................................. 262
TWX300 Proportional Fonts........................................................................................... 264
Proportional Fonts Displayed Over Map Area................................................................ 265
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 15
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Figure 151
Figure 152
Figure 153
Figure 154
Figure 155
Figure 156
Figure 157
Figure 158
Figure 159
Figure 160
Figure 161
Figure 162
Figure 163
Figure 164
Figure 165
Figure 166
Figure 167
Figure 168
Figure 169
Figure 170
Figure 171
Figure 172
Figure 173
Figure 174
Figure 175
Figure 176
Figure 177
Figure 178
Figure 179
Figure 180
Figure 181
Figure 182
Figure 183
Figure 184
Figure 185
Figure 186
Figure 187
Figure 188
Figure 189
Figure 190
Figure 191
Figure 192
Figure 193
Figure 194
Figure 195
Figure 196
Figure 197
Figure 198
Figure 199
Figure 200
Figure 201
Figure 202
ALARM Text File Sample ............................................................................................... 269
Sample .log File.............................................................................................................. 270
Determining the Current Configuration File.................................................................... 278
Configuration Filename Text Box ................................................................................... 278
Selecting a Data Type .................................................................................................... 283
Configuring an EFM Connection .................................................................................... 284
Configuring the RADS Connection................................................................................. 285
Configuring the Relays Connection................................................................................ 285
Configuring Email Notification ........................................................................................ 286
Bad EFM Connections ................................................................................................... 289
Email Equations Tab ...................................................................................................... 290
Input Dialog Box ............................................................................................................. 290
Defining an Email Notification List.................................................................................. 291
Defining Email Notification Time Ranges ....................................................................... 292
Defining a Time Range................................................................................................... 292
Selecting UTC Time ....................................................................................................... 292
Testing an Email Address .............................................................................................. 294
Sending a Test Message................................................................................................ 294
Sample Test Message.................................................................................................... 295
Identify Tab..................................................................................................................... 297
Mercator Projection of the World.................................................................................... 302
Regional Equal-Area India Projection ............................................................................ 303
Regional Equal-Area India Projection ............................................................................ 304
UTM (WGS84), Zone 13, Northern Hemisphere ............................................................ 305
UTM (WGS84), Zone 13, Northern Hemisphere Showing the Area Around 105 Degrees
West306
US State Plane Coordinate System (1983, meters), Showing Oklahoma North Region 307
US State Plane Coordinate System (1983, meters), Showing The World ..................... 308
Aged Lightning Data—1 ................................................................................................. 309
Map Legend—Color Keys .............................................................................................. 310
Data Aging—Time Lapse Example ................................................................................ 312
Aged Lightning Data....................................................................................................... 313
Selecting a Time-Period Length ..................................................................................... 314
Aged Lightning Data—2 ................................................................................................. 314
Map Legend Color Keys Versus Lightning Data Aging .................................................. 316
Create Equation Dialog Box—Relay .............................................................................. 318
Creating Logical Expressions......................................................................................... 319
Test RADS and Relays Dialog Box ................................................................................ 322
Testing RADS and Relays.............................................................................................. 323
Red-Yellow Alert............................................................................................................. 323
Yellow-Green Alert ......................................................................................................... 324
Panel Indicating the Licensed ASCII Output Region...................................................... 326
ASCII Output Panel ........................................................................................................ 326
Licenses Panel ............................................................................................................... 327
Vaisala Lightning Data Server (VLDS) Window—On and Off States............................. 328
VLDS Configuration Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 329
About VLDS Window...................................................................................................... 331
CG and Cloud Flashes at Various Frequency Ranges .................................................. 334
Relationship, Frequency and Lightning Detection Method............................................. 335
Optimal Location Algorithm for Magnetic Direction Finding ........................................... 338
Hyperbolic Intersection................................................................................................... 339
Ambiguous Location, 3-Sensor Hyperbolic Intersection................................................. 340
Circular Intersection Using Three Sensors..................................................................... 341
16 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 203
Figure 204
Figure 205
Figure 206
Figure 207
Figure 208
Figure 209
Circular Intersection Step Using Four Sensors .............................................................. 341
IMPACT Method on a Baseline Between Two Sensors................................................. 342
IMPACT Method: 3 LPATS TOA, 2 IMPACT Sensors ................................................... 343
Triangulation for Interferometric Location ...................................................................... 345
Confidence Ellipse: Unfavorable Sensor Geometry....................................................... 347
Confidence Ellipse: Favorable Sensor Geometry .......................................................... 347
Using Confidence Ellipse to Identify Most Likely Stroke ................................................ 350
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 17
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
18 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
________________________________________________________________________________
List of Tables
Table 1
Table 2
Table 3
Table 4
Table 5
Table 6
Table 7
Table 8
Table 9
Table 10
Table 11
Table 12
Table 13
Table 14
Table 15
Table 16
Table 17
Table 18
Table 19
Table 20
Table 21
Table 22
Table 23
Table 24
Table 25
Table 26
Table 27
Table 28
Table 29
Table 30
Table 31
Table 32
Table 33
Table 34
Table 35
Table 36
Table 37
Table 38
Table 39
Table 40
Table 41
Table 42
Table 43
Table 44
Table 45
Table 46
Document Conventions .................................................................................................... 23
TWX300 Desktop Icon ..................................................................................................... 37
EFM File Viewer Columns ................................................................................................ 44
File Menu Items ................................................................................................................ 55
View Menu Items .............................................................................................................. 56
Tools Menu Items ............................................................................................................. 58
Replay Menu Items .......................................................................................................... 60
Help Menu Items .............................................................................................................. 61
TWX300 Toolbar Items ................................................................................................... 62
TWX300 Status Bar Items ................................................................................................ 64
General Configuration Dialog Box—Common Buttons .................................................... 67
Warning Areas Tab—Functions ....................................................................................... 69
EFMs Tab—Functions...................................................................................................... 72
RADS Equations Tab—Functions .................................................................................... 75
Relay Equations Tab—Functions ..................................................................................... 77
Relay Options Tab—Functions ........................................................................................ 79
Email Equations Tab—Functions ..................................................................................... 81
General Configuration Dialog Box—Common Buttons .................................................... 83
General Tab—Functions .................................................................................................. 85
Connections Tab—Functions ........................................................................................... 89
Density Tab—Functions ................................................................................................... 92
Identify Tab—Functions ................................................................................................... 95
Others Tab—Functions .................................................................................................... 97
Map Legend—Density Mode Functions ......................................................................... 104
Map Legend—Discharge Mode Functions ..................................................................... 106
Layer Control Dialog Box Items...................................................................................... 120
Default Region Style Colors ........................................................................................... 154
Area Definition Dialog Box—Functions .......................................................................... 156
Alerts Status—Data Field Columns ................................................................................ 184
Discharge Type—Display Symbols ................................................................................ 192
Proportional Font Range Categories .............................................................................. 203
Event Polarity Symbols .................................................................................................. 206
Image Filename Specifiers ............................................................................................. 222
Data Query—Field Descriptions ..................................................................................... 226
Discrimination Values ..................................................................................................... 230
Point ID Values............................................................................................................... 232
Replay Types ................................................................................................................. 233
Replay Dialog Box—Functions....................................................................................... 239
HotKey Replay—Data Length ........................................................................................ 245
Replay Frame Rate Versus Time ................................................................................... 245
Accessing TWX300 Display Modes ............................................................................... 260
TWX300 System Font Symbols ..................................................................................... 263
ALARM Text File—Fields ............................................................................................... 269
Communications Status Indicators ................................................................................. 287
Determining Communications Status—Indicators .......................................................... 287
Inspector Dialog Box—Parameters ................................................................................ 298
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 19
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Table 47
Table 48
Table 49
Table 50
Table 51
Data Aging—Time Period vs. Refresh Period ................................................................ 311
Logical Operators ........................................................................................................... 320
VLDS Button/Indicator Functions ................................................................................... 328
VLDS Key Descriptions ................................................................................................. 330
The Scaling Constant and Probability Relationship........................................................ 347
20 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 1 _________________________________________________________General Information
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
About This Manual
This manual provides information for using the TWX300 system to
display and query lightning data while checking and verifying Alarm
conditions.
Contents of This Manual
This manual consists of the following chapters and appendices:
- Chapter 1, General Information, on page 21, provides important
safety, revision history, contact, and warranty information for the
product.
- Chapter 2, TWX300 Overview, on page 27, provides an overview of
the TWX300 application.
- Chapter 3, Understanding the TWX300 Interface, on page 37,
provides information on the graphical user interface (GUI).
- Chapter 4, TWX300 Area Map, on page 115, provides information
on using and navigating the Area Map.
- Chapter 5, Understanding Warning Areas, on page 137, provides
information on creating Warning Areas used for Alerts.
- Chapter 6, Using Electric Field Mill Data, on page 163, provides
information on using EFM data with the TWX300 application.
- Chapter 7, Using RADS and Relays, on page 171, provides
information on using RADS and Relays with the TWX300
application.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 21
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
- Chapter 8, Understanding Alert Status, on page 183, provides
information on viewing and clearing an Alerts status.
- Chapter 9, Viewing Lightning Data, on page 191, provides
information on using TWX300 tools and functions to display
lightning data.
- Chapter 10, Querying Lightning Data, on page 225, provides
information on querying lightning data.
- Chapter 11, Replaying TWX300 Lightning Data, on page 233,
provides information on creating system videos of lightning data for
later replay.
- Chapter 12, TWX300 System Configuration, on page 253, provides
information on Display modes and system and configuration files.
- Chapter 13, TWX300 Communications, on page 281, provides
descriptions for connections and system communications messages.
- Appendix A, Inspector Parameters, on page 297, provides detail on
parameters that Inspector can display.
- Appendix B, Commonly Used Map Projections, on page 301,
provides detail on map projections used by the TWX300
application.
- Appendix C, Data Aging, on page 309, provides information on
data aging real-time and during replay.
- Appendix D, Creating and Testing Logical Expressions, on page
317, provides details on creating and testing logical expressions.
- Appendix E, Using the Vaisala Lightning Data Server, on page 325,
provides information on ASCII output.
- Appendix F, Introduction to Lightning Detection, on page 333,
provides insight to basic lightning detection and location
methodologies.
- Appendix G, Glossary, on page 353, provides descriptions for
acronyms and words use in this text.
22 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 1 _________________________________________________________General Information
Document Conventions
Different typefaces, type styles, and phraseology indicate specific user
interactions with the system as illustrated in Table 1 below.
Table 1
Document Conventions
Item
System prompts, source code, and program
output are in a mono-spaced typeface.
User input is a bold, mono-spaced typeface.
Optional entry is enclosed in square brackets
(for example, /v).
Descriptive term used in place of user-specific
name is in italics and enclosed in angle
brackets (for example, table).
Key names are all capital letters.
Use of ENTER key at the end of a command
Key combinations that are held down
simultaneously are all capital letters and
separated by a plus symbol.
ASCII values are enclosed in angle brackets.
User interface items and command words are
in bold.
Example
c:\temp>
volcheck
format a: [/v]
the <table>.map file
ENTER
<ENTER>
CTRL+X
<CR><LF>
Click Cancel or use the
quit command.
Safety
General Safety Considerations
Throughout the manual, important safety considerations are
highlighted as follows:
WARNING
Warning alerts you to a serious hazard. If you do not read and follow
instructions very carefully at this point, there is a risk of injury or even
death.
CAUTION
Caution warns you of a potential hazard. If you do not read and follow
instructions carefully at this point, the product could be damaged or
important data could be lost.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 23
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
NOTE
Note highlights important information on using the product.
Trademarks
Vaisala and the Vaisala logo are registered trademarks of Vaisala Oyj in
the United States and/or other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP, Windows Vista, and Windows 7
are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in
the United States and/or other countries.
MapInfo, MapX, MapInfo Professional and MapBasic, and the
MapInfo logo are registered trademarks of MapInfo Corporation.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat Reader, and PostScript are registered
trademarks, or trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated in the
United States and/or other countries.
UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other
countries, exclusively licensed through X/Open Company Limited.
Intel, the Intel logo, and Pentium are trademarks or registered
trademarks of the Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United
States and other countries.
All other company, product names including XviD, and brands used
herein may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective companies.
License Agreement
All rights to any software are held by Vaisala or third parties. The
customer is allowed to use the software only to the extent that is
provided by the applicable supply contract or Software License
Agreement.
24 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 1 _________________________________________________________General Information
Warranty
For certain products Vaisala normally gives a limited one year
warranty. Please observe that any such warranty may not be valid in
case of damage due to normal wear and tear, exceptional operating
conditions, negligent handling or installation, or unauthorized
modifications. Please see the applicable supply contract or conditions
of sale for details of the warranty for each product.
Technical Support
For technical support, return authorization (RMA), repair status, and
spare parts, contact the Customer Response Center.
Tel:
1 888 424 9899 (within USA & Canada)
+011 520 294 2145 (international)
E-mail:
[email protected]
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 25
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
This page intentionally left blank.
26 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 2 _________________________________________________________ TWX300 Overview
CHAPTER 2
TWX300 OVERVIEW
The Vaisala Thunderstorm Warning System, or TWX300, is a local
area lightning display and warning system that operates on the
Windows 2000 (with SP4), XP (with SP2), Vista or 7 platform.
TWX300 gathers Central data from the SAFIR detection system
(SCM), the National Lightning Detection Network (U.S. NLDN), an
LP, CP or TLP series central processor, and electric field mills (EFMs).
Configuration parameters are password-protected. See Figure 1 below.
Figure 1
TWX300 Display
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 27
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
The TWX300 application allows you to:
- Store, display, and replay lightning and EFM data
- Display user-configured Warning Areas over an Area Map
- View electric field mill (EFM) activity
- Configure Warning Area definitions
- Configure Alert conditions for EFMs and Warning Areas
- Configure Alarms, for RADS, Relays and email notifications
- Replay and view archived lightning and electric field event files
(EFM) over an Area Map
- Configure color keys (used for the visualization of lightning activity
based on a time-period selection)
- EFM command and control (limited). Refer to your EFM
documentation for specific information.
- Access On-line Help
- Determine the most recent activity
- Send an Email when an Alarm occurs
- Test and exercise the RADS and RELAYS using the Alarms Output
Test
- Provide password-protection
- Save an image file of the Display automatically (when licensed)
- Provide ASCII Output (when licensed)
- Connect to other licensed copies of the TWX300 Display
application using the Vaisala Lightning Data Server (VLDS)
Display Modes
Two user-selectable Display modes are available:
1.
Discharge–Display of lightning discharges (IC and CG
discharges).
2.
Density–Display of lightning discharge density.
28 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 2 _________________________________________________________ TWX300 Overview
Supported Data Types
TWX300 supports the following data types:
- LP
- NLDN
- Secondary
Processing Tasks
- Employs a RADS warning system using boolean equations that
combine Warning Area and EFM data.
- Manages up to 8 relays using boolean equations that combine
Warning Area and EFM data.
- Manages unlimited email notifications using boolean equations that
combine Warning Area and EFM data.
- Provides a statistical monitoring histogram displaying the number
of lightning discharges occurring in a user-defined area.
- Provides real-time density calculation using online user settings.
- Provides real-time detailed information on cloud-to-ground
lightning discharges.
Display Tasks
- Display of lightning data.
- Provides online selection of map backgrounds (geosets), layers and
projections.
- Provides Display tools (zoom in/out, pan, predefined zoom and
display center, grid, color scales, etc.).
- Provides geographic tools (distance and direction measurements,
geographical coordinates, etc.).
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 29
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Using Anti-Virus Software
The TWX300 system is compatible with industry-standard anti-virus
software.
NOTE
Refer to the ReadMe.txt file located on the Installation CD for details
on tested and approved anti-virus software.
Using Screen Savers
Use of a screen saver other than the Windows Blank Screen selection is
not recommended.
NOTE
Because the TWX300 application cannot yield available resources,
Vaisala recommends that the TWX300 application and its utilities be
the only application running on the system PC.
Displaying Version Information
The software version number is displayed in the opening splash screen.
To view TWX300 software version number while TWX300 is running:
- From the TWX300 menu, select Help > About. The TWX300
About splash screen displays as shown in Figure 2. The version
number is displayed in the center of the splash screen. Windows 7
may display a different path for the Program name.
30 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 2 _________________________________________________________ TWX300 Overview
Figure 2
Displaying Version Information
Displaying TWX300 Legal Notices
To view software legal notices while TWX300 is running:
1.
From the TWX300 menu, select Help > About. The TWX300
splash screen displays. Refer to Figure 2 for detail.
2.
Click Legal Notices button. A window displaying pertinent legal
information displays as shown in Figure 3.
Figure 3
3.
NOTE
Displaying the Legal Notice
Click OK to close the window.
The name of the current Configuration file displays in the Legal
Notice title bar.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 31
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Copyright Notice
No part of this file may be reproduced in any form or by any means,
electronic or mechanical (including photocopying), nor may its
contents be communicated to a third party without prior written
permission of the copyright holder.
The contents are subject to change without prior notice.
Please observe that this manual does not create any legally binding
obligations for Vaisala towards the customer or end user. All legally
binding commitments and agreements are included exclusively in the
applicable supply contract or Conditions of Sale.
Portions of this computer program are owned by MapInfo Corporation,
Copyright (c) 2004 MapInfo Corporation, all rights reserved. Use,
duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions
as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data
and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or
subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. Manufacturer is
MapInfo Corporation, One Global View, Troy, NY 12180. Rights are
reserved under copyright laws of the United States with respect to
unpublished portions of the Software.
XviD Codec Copyright Notice
XviD is distributed under the GNU GPL license. Copyright (C) 1989,
1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
32 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 2 _________________________________________________________ TWX300 Overview
Getting Technical Support
For Technical Support contact:
Vaisala Incorporated
Tel. 011 520 806 7300
Tucson Operations
Fax: 011 520 741 2848
2705 East Medina Road
Toll free (US) 1 888 424 9899
Tucson, Arizona USA
Email: [email protected]
Or visit our Internet pages at http://www.vaisala.com/
Using Context-Sensitive, or "What’s This" Help
1.
While TWX300 is running, place the cursor in Select mode by
clicking
.
2.
Place the cursor over an open TWX300 dialog box, map area, or
object.
3.
Left-click the object.
4.
Press the F1 key. The appropriate Help displays.
Using Task-Oriented Help—Main Help File
Method One
- From the TWX300 Main menu, select Help > Help Topics. The
Help file displays.
Method Two
- Click Help whenever it is displayed in a TWX300 dialog box.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 33
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Printing the Help File
This Help file is not configured for printing. If you do print a topic, it is
recommended that you set the default printer to Landscape mode
before printing. This will aid in properly orienting Help file graphics.
Using Links in Help
- Click on an underlined link to display Help for that subject.
Changing Help Font Size
- Select Options > Font in an TWX300 Help window to set a font
size as needed for proper viewing.
Adding a Custom Logo
Add Custom Logo to Main Screen
Display a custom logo to the right of the VAISALA logo in the main
application screen. The logo must be a bitmap file with a height of 25
pixels.
To enable this feature, the logo should be placed in the executable
directory and named CustomerLogo.bmp.
Add Custom Logo to Generated
Images
Display a custom logo at the top of the VAISALA logo on all the saved
images. The logo must be a bitmap file. The VAISALA logo displayed
on the generated images is 155x50 pixels.
To enable this feature the logo should be placed in the executable
directory and named CustomerLogoScr.bmp.
34 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 2 _________________________________________________________ TWX300 Overview
Add Custom Logo to Printed Maps
Display a custom logo at the top of the VAISALA logo on all printed
maps. The logo must be a bitmap file. The VAISALA logo displayed
on the printed maps is 260x80 pixels.
To enable this feature the logo should be placed in the executable
directory and named CustomerLogoLpr.bmp.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 35
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
36 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
CHAPTER 3
UNDERSTANDING THE TWX300
INTERFACE
The contents of this chapter describe the TWX300 interface; including
associated windows, dialog boxes, buttons and messages. The Area
Map is discussed in Chapter 4 on page 115. All other related dialog
boxes and windows are discussed where appropriate.
Desktop Icon
A TWX300 icon placed on your Desktop during the installation process, provides access to TWX300 along with its companion applications. Table 2 below describes the TWX300 icon and its function.
Table 2
Icon
TWX300 Desktop Icon
Application
TWX300 Application
Function
Clicking the TWX300 icon starts the
TWX300 Application Launcher that
provides access to TWX300 related
applications.
TWX300 Application Launcher
The TWX300 Application Launcher allows you to quickly access
lightning and system data for viewing. Clicking on a button displays an
associated window or dialog box, permitting you to select pertinent
data for display. See Figure 1 on page 38.
The following subsections describe available options.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 37
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Figure 1
TWX300 Application Launcher
38 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Main Application Button
Clicking the Main application button launches the TWX300
application. Once started you have access to all TWX300 functions.
Figure 4
TWX300 Display
Exiting TWX300
Method One
- Click the Windows Close button to stop and close TWX300. The
Quit message displays while the application "cleans-up" before
shutting down.
Method Two
- In the TWX300 Menu, select File > Exit. The Quit message
displays while the application "cleans-up" before shutting down.
NOTE
In using either method, you will need to enter the correct password to
properly close and exit the TWX300 application.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 39
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Diagnostic Replay Button
Clicking the Diagnostic replay button launches the TWX300 Replay
dialog box. The interface allows you to define time-periods used to
replay archived or recent lightning data. See Figure 5 below.
Figure 5
Diagnostic Replay—Example 1
TWX300 diagnostic replay tool replays data archived by TWX300.
During the replay the Diagnostic function re performs all alert process
that triggered RADS and Relays functions as in real-time. During
replay, RADS and Relays will not be affected and only the RADS and
relays window will display RADS and relays states. The email sent by
TWX300 will be logged in the Information window only.
NOTE
Because the function is entered via the TWX300 Application
Launcher and not from within the TWX300 application, Diagnostic
Replay mode cannot be used while the main TWX300 application is
running.
40 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
This tool has most of the options of the TWX300 Replay function;
however, any changes made to the Configuration file are not saved.
This prevents the actual Configuration file from becoming corrupted
after making many changes. You can use this feature to test and tune
your system Configuration file.
To differentiate this tool from the regular TWX300 Replay function,
the tool bar background changes to red and the taskbar title scrolls. See
Figure 6 below.
For more information on Diagnostic Replay, see Diagnostic Replay on
page 249.
Figure 6
NOTE
Diagnostic Replay—Example 2
Diagnostic Replay has no backward function. Meaning you cannot go
backwards during replay, only forwards.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 41
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Central Data File Viewer Button
Clicking the Central data file viewer button launches the TWX300
Central file viewer. The interface allows you to display, in text format,
Central data from the TWX300 system. See Figure 7 below.
Figure 7
Central Data File Viewer
42 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
EFM Data File Viewer Button
Clicking the EFM data file viewer button launches the TWX300
EFM data file viewer. The interface allows you to view archived or
recent EFM data. See Figure 8 below.
Figure 8
EFM File Viewer
Using the File Viewer
1.
With the Application Launcher displayed, click the EFM data
file viewer button. The viewer displays. See Figure 8 above.
2.
From the file viewer menu, click File > Open. The Open dialog
box displays.
3.
From the TWX300_archive\EFMx directory, select a file for
viewing.
4.
Click the Open button.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 43
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
5.
The selected file displays as illustrated in Figure 8 above.
The current filename displays in the title bar.
The file contains information described in Table 3 below.
Table 3
Column
Timetag
UTC
Local
EFM Values
Highest
Median
EFM File Viewer Columns
Information
Time in UTC format data was received by system.
Local time in PC format data was received by system.
Highest displays the absolute highest value recorded in onesecond.
Median displays the median value recorded in one-second.
Quitting the Function
Method One
- Click the Windows Close button to stop and close the function.
Method Two
- In the file viewer menu, select File > Exit.
44 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Alarm File Viewer Button
Clicking the Alarm file viewer button launches the TWX300 Alarm
file viewer. The interface allows you to view archived or recent Alarm
data. Data displayed can be used for a backward analysis of Alarm(s)
triggered by the TWX300 system. See Figure 9 below.
For more information on using this feature, select the Help menu item
located in the menu.
Figure 9
Alarm File Viewer
For more information on understanding the file, or navigating the EFM
graph, refer to Chapter 6, Using Electric Field Mill Data, on page 163.
Using the File Viewer
1.
With the Application Launcher displayed, click the Alarm file
viewer button. The viewer displays. See Figure 9 above and
Figure 11 on page 48.
2.
From the menu, click File > Open. The Open dialog box
displays.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 45
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
3.
From the TWX300_archive\ALARM directory, select a file for
viewing.
4.
Click the Open button.
5.
The selected file displays as illustrated in Figure 9 above.
The filename displays in the title bar.
Data displays on a timeline indicating the state of the following:
- Warning Areas
- EFMs
- RADS
- Relays
NOTE
If one of the above list is missing, it is an indication that there are no
changes in the file you opened.
Selecting a File by Date
1.
From the menu, select File > Select files using the calendar.
The calendar displays over the file viewer.
2.
Accept the default file location; or using the Searching path
button, select the location of your ALARM files.See Figure 10
below and Figure 9 on page 45.
3.
Select a month by using the right and left arrows in the Month
text area.
The current month displays in the Month title area and the
current date displays at the bottom of the calendar area.
46 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
February is used in the example below.
Figure 10
File Viewer Calendar
4.
Using the mouse, select a date from the calendar.
5.
Click Validate. The data displays.
If no data are present, or you do not have a file for the selected
date, a message will display. Click the dialog box Close button
located in the right-most top corner of the dialog box.
Navigating the Graph Window
- You can only zoom and move the timeline part of the graph.
Zoom In
- Left-click the graph at the Start time you want to zoom-in on, and
drag the mouse up to the End time of the period you want to view.
Dragging should be done from the top-left to bottom-right.
Reset Default View
- Left-click the graph and drag the mouse in the opposite direction
(from bottom/right to top/left).
Timeline
Moving the Timeline
- Right-click and drag the graph to the date you want to see.
Or:
- You can move the timeline when it is visible by clicking on the
graph at the time/position you want the line to be drawn.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 47
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Hide the Timeline
- At any moment you can display or hide the timeline by doubleclicking on one of the graphics. The timeline displays a line on all
the graphics to accurately indicate the state of each feature at the
time.
Quitting the Function
Method One
- Click the Windows Close button to stop and close the function. See
Figure 11 below.
Method Two
- In the file viewer menu, select File > Exit.
Figure 11
Viewing an Alarm File
48 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Configuration File Viewer Button
Clicking the Configuration file viewer button launches the TWX300
Configuration file viewer. The interface allows you to quickly and
efficiently view system configuration data. See Figure 12 below.
Figure 12
Configuration File Viewer
Using the File Viewer
1.
With the Application Launcher displayed, click the
Configuration file viewer button. The viewer displays. See
Figure 12 above.
2.
From the file viewer menu, click File > Open. The Open dialog
box displays.
3.
From the TWX300\config directory, select a file for viewing.
4.
Click OK to open the File. The file opens.
The current filename is displayed in the title bar.
5.
The selected file displays as illustrated in Figure 12 above.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 49
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Saving and Renaming a File
1.
With the file displayed, click the Save as.. from the menu. The
Save As dialog box displays.
2.
In the Save in text box, enter select a location for the file to be
placed, or accept the default location.
3.
Enter a name to save the file as, in the File name text box.
4.
Select what file type to save the file as, or accept the default Save
as type.
5.
Click Save to accept the changes.
6.
Close the function with the Windows Close button.
Printing the File
This action assumes you have properly connected to a local or network
printer.
- With the file displayed, from the menu select File > Print. The
configuration file data is sent to the printer.
Quitting the Function
Method One
- Click the Windows Close button to stop and close the function.
Method Two
- In the file viewer menu, select File > Exit.
50 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
TWXS1200 Central Data File
Converter Button
Clicking the TWXS1200 Central Data File Converter button
launches the TWX300 TWXS1200 Central Data File Converter. The
interface allows you to convert TWXS1200 Central .pws data, to
TWX300 system data (Secondary Type 4). See Figure 9 below.
Figure 13
Data File Converter
This function converts a TWXS1200 Central data file(s), to TWX300
Central data file(s). It reads a TWXS1200 Central data file and
converts it into the new Central data format (Data Type 4) used by
TWX300.
For more information on using this feature, select the Help menu item
located in the menu.
Using the Data Converter
1.
With the Application Launcher displayed, click the TWXS1200
Central Data File Converter button. The converter displays.
See Figure 13 above.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 51
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
2.
Define a path for the newly converted files to be placed using the
, or accept the default path.
The converted file can be placed anywhere you want. But in
order to use it with TWX300 they are placed into the TWX300
archive or the backup Central directory (better).
3.
In the Site name text box, enter a filename extension.
Whatever you enter in this field is used as the filename extension
for the generated files. The Site name entered must be the same
as the one configured in the General configuration >
Connections tab (primary source). If left blank, the default
filename extension will be *.bin.
The site name is used to append the name of the site to the end of
the file. If you work with several sites TWX300 will read only
the files from the configured site.
4.
Click Add files... The Open dialog box displays.
5.
Select a .pws file from the location, and click Open in the Open
dialog box.
Add the TWXS1200 central files you want to convert to the list
by clicking on the Add pws files button or by dragging and
dropping files on the list.
A TWXS1200 file contain 1 hour of data, while the Secondary
Data Type 4 file contain 24 hours of data (from 00:00:00 UTC to
23:59:59 UTC). Therefore, in order to create a complete
Secondary Data Type 4 file you must select 24 consecutive
TWXS1200 Central files that begin at 00:00:00 UTC (files like
CEN20040803_XX00.pws where XX goes from 00 to 23).
The list is automatically sorted from the oldest file to the most
recent.
6.
Click Process all. This action begins the conversion process.
7.
Status indicators at the bottom of the TWXS1200 Central Data
File Converter dialog box display progress of the conversion.
When the conversion process is complete, the message File
processed displays.
The converted files are located in the directory you selected at
the beginning.
8.
When done, click the Windows Close button.
The file can now be viewed using TWX300.
52 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
CAUTION
If you process the same file(s) several times without removing the processed files, you may corrupt the processed files by appending the
converted data to the same Data Type 4 file.
Removing a File Before Conversion
Once a file is selected and added to the conversion list, you may
remove the file by:
1.
With the TWXS1200 Central Data File Converter displayed,
select the filename from the list under the Site name text box.
2.
Click Remove selected. This action removes the file from the
list.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 53
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Starting and Stopping TWX300
Before the TWX300 application opens, it reads all archived files.
Because archived files can be quite large, it may sometimes take
awhile for the application to start.
Start
Method One
- Double-click the TWX300 Desktop icon (see Table 2 on page 37)
and click on the Main application button. The application starts.
Method Two
1.
Click Start in the Windows Status bar.
2.
Select Programs > TWX300 and click on the TWX300
application icon (see Table 2 on page 37). The application starts.
Stop
Method One
- Click the Windows Close button to stop and close TWX300. The
Quit message displays while the application "cleans-up" before
shutting down.
Method Two
- In the TWX300 Menu, select File > Exit. The Quit message
displays while the application "cleans-up" before shutting down.
NOTE
In using either method, you will need to enter the correct password to
properly close and exit the TWX300 application.
54 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Understanding Main Menu Items
The Main menu provides access to TWX300 commands (see Figure 14
below). Most of these commands can be accessed via the TWX300
toolbar as well. Clicking on an item displays a menu for the selected
item as described in Table 4 below through Table 8 on page 61.
Figure 14
NOTE
TWX300 Main Menu
An "x" in the PP column in the following tables, indicate that item is a
password-protected function.
File Menu Items
When an icon appears next to a line item, that icon is described along
with its text counterpart.
Table 4
File Menu Items
PP
Item
X
Load configuration...
X
X
X
Function
Select to display a dialog box allowing
you to load a saved Configuration file.
Save configuration
Select to display a dialog box allowing
you to save a Configuration file.
Save configuration as... Select to display a dialog box allowing
you to save a Configuration file in a
user-named file.
Save image...
Select to display the Save Image dialog
box. This permits you to save the current
displayed area to an image file.
Print...
Select to display the Windows Print
dialog box. This permits you to print a
copy of the displayed map area.
Exit
Selecting Exits (quits) the TWX300
application.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 55
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
View Menu Items
When an icon appears next to a line item, that icon is described along
with its text counterpart.
Table 5
PP
View Menu Items
Item
Function
Display
EFM
Toggles between the two display modes.
Selecting displays the EFM Status
window from which you can select EFM
commands and view a graph of EFM
activity.
Alerts status
Selecting displays the Alerts Status
dialog box for determining Alerts Status.
Legend
Selecting displays the Legend dialog
box used in determining the age of an
event.
Monitor
Selecting displays the Monitor window
used in determining lightning counts for
a selected Warning Area.
Predefined zooms
Selecting displays the Predefined
Zooms dialog box allowing you to select
from saved views for display.
Discharge types
Selecting displays the Discharge Types
dialog box used to select which type of
lightning data to display from CC, CG or
IC.
Information window
Selecting displays the Information
window where messages from the
TWX300 System are displayed.
Messages and bulletins Selecting displays the Messages and
bulletins window where messages from
the Vaisala NCC are displayed.
56 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Table 5
PP
View Menu Items (Continued)
Item
RADS and Relays
status
Time lapse histogram
Scale bar
Lat/lon grid
Proportional font
Highlight last event
Next font
Full screen
Function
Selecting displays current RADS and
Relay Status in a graph.
Selecting displays the Time-lapse
histogram.
Selecting displays the TWX300 scale
bar.
Toggles the Map Grid laid over the Area
Map.
Selecting displays proportional fonts
whose display size is proportional
(relative) to the strength of the selected
event.
Selecting turns-on a distinctive visual
cue to indicate the last event displayed.
Selecting this command allows you to
cycle through four preset fonts, or
symbols used in indicating events.
These fonts include: hollow, solid,
enclosed event symbols, along with
points.
Selecting displays the map at full screen
size. While in this mode the menu bar,
toolbar and taskbar are not visible.
You can toggle this mode using the
keyboard shortcut Ctrl+F, or by rightclicking on the map and select the
Toggle full screen option.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 57
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Tools Menu Items
When an icon appears next to a line item, that icon is described along
with its text counterpart.
Table 6
PP
Tools Menu Items
Item
Function
GIS
Select—Selecting changes cursor into
the Select tool, useful for accessing
context-sensitive Help.
Zoom in—Selecting Zooms in on the
current image. Cursor turns into a
magnifying glass with a "+" symbol,
allowing you to zoom in on the current
image.
Zoom out—Selecting Zooms out on the
current image. Cursor turns into a
magnifying glass with a "-" symbol,
allowing you to zoom out on the current
image.
Pan—Selecting changes the cursor into
a hand so that you can "grab" and move
the map area. This allows you to view a
map area that is not currently visible.
Discharge information—Selecting
changes cursor into the Select tool, for
selecting lightning data. Once an event
is selected, Inspector automatically
displays with specific information related
to the selected event.
Distance & Bearing—Selecting
changes the cursor into the "crosshairs"
symbol; allowing you to place the cursor
on the Area Map to obtain distance and
bearing values to another object (city,
road, event, etc.), relative to the original
cursor position selected.
Zoom all—Selecting zooms to extents
of displayed lightning in your subscribed
area.
58 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Table 6
PP
X
X
X
Tools Menu Items (Continued)
Item
Configuration...
Function
Selecting displays the General
Configuration dialog box, allowing you to
view or change current configuration and
connection settings.
Alarm Configuration... Displays the Alarm Configuration dialog
box so you can view and change current
configuration and connection settings.
Modify warning areas... Selecting displays the Area Definition
dialog box, allowing you to create or
modify a Warning Area.
Query data...
Selecting displays the Query Data dialog
box, allowing you to query data for
flashes within the date and time entered
into the dialog box.
Test RADS and
Selecting displays the Test RADS and
Relays...
Relay Alarms dialog box, allowing you to
test a RADS or Relay function.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 59
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Replay Menu Items
When an icon appears next to a line item, that icon is described along
with its text counterpart.
Table 7
PP
Replay Menu Items
Item
Function
Hot key
Selecting allows you to select from the
previous 30, 60, 90 or 120 minutes for
replay. Using the associated "Hotkey"
(F5 through F8) provides the same
function, but without using the menu
item.
Selecting displays the Replay dialog
box, allowing you to select from
Archived data for replay.
Standard...
60 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Help Menu Items
When an icon appears next to a line item, that icon is described along
with its text counterpart.
Table 8
PP
Help Menu Items
Item
Function
Help topics...
Selecting displays the TWX300 main
Help file.
Selecting displays TWX300 debug
windows.
Selecting hides TWX300 debug
windows.
Selecting displays the TWX300 About
dialog box, which includes version, build
and program information. Includes a
button to access Vaisala Legal Notices.
Show logs...
Hide logs
About...
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 61
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Understanding Toolbar Items
The toolbar provides access to TWX300 controls and functions via
button icons. See Figure 15 below.
Figure 15
TWX300 Toolbar
Table 9 below provides descriptions of toolbar buttons and their
associated function.
Table 9
Button
TWX300 Toolbar Items
Function
Print—Click to display the Print dialog box.
Display Discharges—Click to set the Display to Discharges
mode. The colors used are set using the color-aging Legend.
Display Density—Click to set the Display to Density mode.
Select—Click to place the cursor in the Select mode. Default
mode.
Zoom In—Click to place cursor in the Zoom in mode.
Zoom Out—Click to place cursor in the Zoom out mode.
Pan—Click to place cursor in the Pan mode.
Identify—Click to place cursor in the Identify mode when using
Inspector.
Distance and Bearing—Click to place cursor in the Distance
and Bearing mode for measurement.
Zoom all—Click to display all lightning activity displayed in
your subscribed area (Licensed Data Region).
Predefined Zooms—Click to display the Predefined Zooms
dialog box. Select from created zoom levels and areas.
Map Grid—Click to toggle Map Grid on/off displayed over the
Area Map.
Histogram—Click to display the Histogram.
Map Scale Bar—Click to display the Map Scale Bar over the
Area Map.
Proportional Fonts—Click to toggle proportional font symbols
whose display size is proportional to the strength of the
lightning event.
Map Legend—Click to toggle the Map Legend.
62 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Table 9
Button
TWX300 Toolbar Items (Continued)
Function
Replay—Click to display the Replay dialog box.
Vaisala Logo—No function presently
The toolbar turns red when using Diagnostic Replay. Other functions
remain the same. See Figure 16 below.
Figure 16
TWX300 Diagnostic Replay Toolbar
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 63
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Understanding the Status Bar
The TWX300 Status Bar (see Figure 17 below) provides the user much
useful information at-a-glance, regarding the status of the display, data
and connection status.
Figure 17
TWX300 Status Bar
Table 10 below describes the various panels and status indicators
located on the TWX300 Status bar.
Table 10
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
TWX300 Status Bar Items
Function
Current date and time (mm:dd:yyyy) (hh:mm:ss).
Latitude and longitude of cursor position.
Total visible lightning count of displayed region.
IC lightning count of displayed region.
CG+ lightning count of displayed region.
CG- lightning count of displayed region.
Mode—Real-time or Replay mode.
Central data Communications status (Red or Green). Detailed
information pertaining to the selection is displayed when you hover
the mouse over it. See TWX300 Communications on page 281 for
details on color status.
EFM Communications status (Red or Green).
RADS Communications status (Red or Green).
Relays Communications status (Red or Green).
Standard Replay Mode
- When replaying archived data, the Status bar changes to blue.
- The words Replay mode are displayed in the Communications
status panel of the Status bar. See Figure 18 below.
Figure 18
TWX300 Status Bar—Standard Replay Mode
64 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
- Information types provided in the Status bar during Replay are the
same as when in Real-Time mode. The information displayed in the
Status bar reflects actual replay data.
HotKey Replay Mode
- When using HotKeys to replay data, the Status bar changes to blue.
- During HotKey replay mode the words HotKey Replay xx minutes
are displayed in the Communications status panel of the Status bar.
See Figure 19 below.
Figure 19
TWX300 Status Bar—HotKey Replay Mode
Information types provided in the Status bar during the replay are the
same as when in Real-Time mode. The information displayed in the
Status bar reflects the actual replay data.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 65
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Understanding the Alarms Dialog Box
The Alarms dialog box is used to define an Alert Condition, or
conditions, for a selected Warning Area. See Figure 20 below.
An Alert refers to a triggered condition for a Warning Area, or areas.
Alert conditions are defined by one or more of the following:
- An area of concern (Warning Area)
- Time period to monitor
- When the Alarm dialog box is displayed, current settings and
definitions are viewable. Information displayed in the tabs show
you the current state, selections, and relative values of items
associated with the selected tab. Any options not available to you
are disabled.
- Each Warning Area has a timer independent of others. The purpose
of the timer is to clear an alert after a user-defined time period has
passed with no Alert criteria. The time resolution for clearing Alerts
is one-second.
Figure 20
Alarms Dialog Box
66 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Displaying the Alarms Dialog Box
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select Tools > Configuration.
The Enter Password dialog box displays.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The General Configuration dialog box
displays.
4.
Click the General tab.
5.
In the Alarms panel, click
box displays.
. The Alarms dialog
Four buttons (common on most TWX300 dialog boxes) located at the
bottom of the dialog box let you control how modifications to the
Configuration file are handled. A description of the buttons and their
associated functions are described in Table 11 below.
Table 11
General Configuration Dialog Box—Common
Buttons
Button
Function
Click to save the current modifications to the configuration
and leaves the dialog box displayed.
Click to save the current modifications to the configuration
and exit the dialog box.
Click to close the dialog box without saving or changing any
modifications.
Click to display the TWX300 Help file.
NOTE
When displayed, current settings and definitions are viewable. If an
option is grayed-out, it is either not available, or the wrong password
may have been entered.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 67
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Using the Warning Areas Tab
The Warning Areas tab allows you to define parameters used in
displaying and configuring Warning Areas for display. Sound files can
also be selected for audible cues to Alert modes.
Displaying the Warning Areas Tab
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select Tools > Configuration.
The Password dialog box displays.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The General Configuration dialog box
displays.
4.
Click the General tab.
5.
Click
6.
Click the Warning Areas tab. See Figure 21 below.
Figure 21
NOTE
. The Alarms dialog box displays.
Warning Areas Tab
When displayed, current settings and definitions are viewable. If an
option is grayed-out, it is either not available (because the parameter
cannot be changed while the selected Warning Area is used in one of
the equations), or the wrong password may have been entered.
68 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Table 12 below describes the Alarm dialog box, Warning Areas tab
functions and buttons.
Table 12
Panel, Button or Icon
Warning Areas Tab—Functions
Column, Field or Button
Function
WA Displays a list of configured Warning
Areas. When a Warning Area is selected
from the list configuration settings for that
area are viewable.
Enabled A check mark indicates the Warning Area
is Enabled.
Name Configured Warning Area name.
Time [sec] Alarm duration time—A value between 1
and 3600. This value defines the time
period (in seconds) in which the selected
Warning Area remains in Alert.
Visible A check mark indicates the Warning Area
is visible.
CG Indicates if the warning area alert state will
be triggered by cloud to ground events
IC Indicates if the warning area alert state will
be triggered by intra-cloud events
Beep A check mark indicates the selected
Warning Area will sound an audible tone
when in Alert.
Sound A check mark indicates a sound file will
play when the selected Warning Area is in
Alert.
Enabled Checking enables the selected Warning
Area.
NOTE: This option cannot be changed
when the Warning Area is used in the
RADS or relays equations.
Alert duration time [sec] Enter a value between 1 and 3600. This
defines the time period in which the
selected Warning Area remains In Alert.
Visible Checking makes the selected Warning
Area visible over the Area Map.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 69
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Table 12
Panel, Button or Icon
Warning Areas Tab—Functions (Continued)
Column, Field or Button
Function
Cloud to ground Checking enable the warning area to be
triggered in alert when cloud to ground
events occurs in the area
Intra cloud Checking enable the warning area to be
triggered in alert when intra cloud events
occurs in the area
Beep Checking directs TWX300 to emit a PC
beep when the selected Warning Area
goes In Alert.
Use sound Checking directs TWX300 to play a
selected sound file when the selected
Warning Area goes In Alert.
Alert sound Displays the path and filename of the
sound file used for In Alert when Use
sound is checked. The default path and
filename are displayed. You may use your
own sound file.
Clear sound Displays the path and filename of the
sound file used for a Clear when Use
sound is checked. The default path and
filename are displayed.
Click to change the sound file used when
Use sound is checked.
Click to test the sound file used when Use
sound is checked.
70 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Using the EFMs Tab
The EFMs tab allows you to define parameters for each EFM. Sound
files can also be selected for audible cues to Alert modes.
Displaying the EFMs Tab
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select Tools > Configuration.
The Password dialog box displays.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The General Configuration dialog box
displays.
4.
Click the General tab.
5.
Click
6.
Click the EFMs tab. See Figure 22 below.
Figure 22
NOTE
. The Alarms dialog box displays.
EFMs Tab
When displayed, current settings and definitions are viewable. If an
option is grayed-out, it is either not available (because the parameter
cannot be changed while the selected EFM is used in one of the equations), or the wrong password may have been entered.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 71
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Table 13 below, describes the Alarm dialog box EFMs tab functions
and buttons.
Table 13
Panel, Button or Icon
EFMs Tab—Functions
Column, Field or Button
Function
EFM
Enabled
Name
Threshold
Time [sec]
Beep
EFM number.
Check displays if EFM is enabled.
Configured EFM name.
Displays configured Threshold value.
Displays configured Time value.
If a check mark displays, the Beep option
is selected.
Sound If a check mark displays, the Sound option
is selected.
Enabled Selecting enables the selected EFM. A
check mark displays in the Enabled
column.
NOTE: This option cannot be changed
when the EFM is used in the RADS or
relays equations.
Threshold In the Threshold text box, enter a value
from 0 to 10000 V/m. The value displays in
the Threshold column.
Example: If 1000 is entered, any
discharge above 1000 V/m or below -1000
V/m will set the EFM in Alert.
Alert duration time [sec] In the Alert duration time [sec] text box,
enter a value from 1 to 3600, this is the
time the EFM stays in Alert after the
Threshold was last crossed. The value
displays in the Time [sec] column.
Beep on alert Select if you want an audible beep to occur
when the EFM goes into Alert mode. A
check mark displays in the Beep column.
72 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Table 13
Panel, Button or Icon
EFMs Tab—Functions (Continued)
Column, Field or Button
Function
Use sound Select to use your own sound file located
on the hard disk.
Alert sound Displays when the Use sound option is
selected. Use
to locate the sound file
the system is to use for an Alert condition.
Clear sound Displays when the Use sound option is
selected. Use
to locate the sound file
the system is to use for an Clear condition.
Click to change the sound file used when
Use sound is checked.
Click to test the sound file used when Use
sound is checked.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 73
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Using the RADS Equations Tab
The RADS equations tab allows you to define RADS parameters used
in RADS equations (logical expressions). A buzzer can also be
selected for audible cues.
Displaying the RADS Equations Tab
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select Tools > Configuration.
The Password dialog box displays.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The General Configuration dialog box
displays.
4.
Click the General tab.
5.
Click
6.
Click the RADS equations tab. See Figure 23 below.
Figure 23
NOTE
. The Alarms dialog box displays.
RADS Equations Tab
When displayed, current settings and definitions are viewable. If an
option is grayed-out, it is either not available, or the wrong password
may have been entered.
74 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Table 14 below describes Alarm dialog box, RADS Equations tab
functions and buttons.
Table 14
RADS Equations Tab—Functions
Panel, Button or Icon Purpose
Select this option if you want an audible tone to emit when in the Alarm mode
configured for the selected item, select the Buzzer option. Selections
include: Red, Red-Yellow, Yellow or Yellow-Green Alarm(s).
Selecting displays the Create Equation dialog box for RADS Red. The
equation that makes up the condition displays to the right of the graphic.
Selecting displays the Create Equation dialog box for RADS Red-Yellow. The
equation that makes up the condition displays to the right of the graphic.
Selecting displays the Create Equation dialog box for RADS Yellow. The
equation that makes up the condition displays to the right of the graphic.
Selecting displays the Create Equation dialog box for RADS Yellow-Green.
The equation that makes up the condition displays to the right of the graphic.
If none are selected the None of the above indicator displays.
The text box to the right of each of the RADS equation buttons displays the
current logical equation for the selected button.
Conditions to flash RADS
Number of EFMs not The value entered here tells the system to flash RADS when the number
sending good data defined in this text box is met, or exceeded. In the example above, RADS will
flash when 1 or more EFMs is not sending good data.
Additional seconds When the value entered here is met or exceeded, RADS flashes. This means
beyond default with no data from Central or from the EFM(s) are being received.
no Central or EFM NOTE: The RADS hardware flashes after 30-seconds of data not being
data. received. Therefore, if you define 60-seconds here, the RADS will begin
flashing after 90-seconds of data not being received.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 75
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Using the Relays Equations Tab
The Relays equations tab allows you to define Relay parameters used
in Relay equations (logical expressions).
Displaying the Relay Equations Tab
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select Tools > Configuration.
The Password dialog box displays.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The General Configuration dialog box
displays.
4.
Click the General tab.
5.
Click
6.
Click the Relay equations tab. See Figure 25 below.
Figure 24
NOTE
. The Alarms dialog box displays.
Relay Equations Tab
When displayed, current settings and definitions are viewable. If an
option is grayed-out, it is either not available, or the wrong password
may have been entered.
76 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Table 15 below describes Alarm dialog box, Relay equations tab
functions and buttons.
Table 15
Relay Equations Tab—Functions
Panel, Icon or Button Purpose
Click to select a Relay for configuration. Displays the Create logical
expressions dialog box allowing you to create a logical expression using
the selected relay. The Relay equation associated with the selected relay
displays to the right. See below.
The text box to the right of each of the Relay equation buttons displays the
current logical equation for the selected Relay button.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 77
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Using the Relay Options Tab
The Relay options tab allows you to define relay options including:
start-up states, trigger states and defining time-periods for states.
Displaying the Relay Options Tab
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select Tools > Configuration.
The Password dialog box displays.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The General Configuration dialog box
displays.
4.
Click the General tab.
5.
Click
6.
Click the Relay options tab. See Figure 25 below.
Figure 25
NOTE
. The Alarms dialog box displays.
Relay Options Tab
When displayed, current settings and definitions are viewable. If an
option is grayed-out, it is either not available, or the wrong password
may have been entered.
78 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Table 16 below describes Alarm dialog box, Relay Options tab
functions and buttons. An Active or Inactive State is determined by the
black dot in the column.
Table 16
Relay Options Tab—Functions
Panel, Icon or Button Purpose
Total number of relays displays. View data directly to the right of the Relay
number to define states and times.
Select the relay Startup state option.
Active—The Relay is active at startup.
Inactive—The Relay is inactive at startup.
Select the relay Trigger state option.
Active—The Relay is active when triggered.
Inactive—The Relay is inactive when triggered.
Time ranges
This panel gives the user the opportunity to set a time-range period
where the relay can be triggered. Out of the selected time range the
relay will be set to the start up value.
In the example at left:
- Relay one can only be triggered between 9:00 am and 4:00 pm
in local time (PC time zone setting).
-
Relay 2 can only be triggered between 6:00 pm and 6:00 am
the next day (also in local time).
-
Relay 3 can only be triggered between 4:00 pm and 11:00 pm
in UTC time.
enabled Selecting allows the system to send email notification only during the times
selected.
between Select a beginning time.
and Select an end time.
use UTC time Selecting forces the system to use UTC time to send email notification rather
than local time.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 79
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Using the Email Equations Tab
The Email equations tab allows you to define Email equations used in
sending email notification(s). You can send email to multiple users and
define a time-period for notification.
For details see Configuring Email Notification on page 290.
Displaying the Email Equations Tab
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select Tools > Configuration.
The Password dialog box displays.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The General Configuration dialog box
displays.
4.
Click the General tab.
5.
Click
6.
Click the Email equations tab. See Figure 26 below.
Figure 26
NOTE
. The Alarms dialog box displays.
Email Equations Tab
When displayed, current settings and definitions are viewable. If an
option is grayed-out, it is either not available, or the wrong password
may have been entered.
80 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Table 17 below describes Alarm dialog box, Email equations tab
functions and buttons.
Table 17
Email Equations Tab—Functions
Panel, Icon or Button Purpose
Email notification list This panel allows you to create user-specific lists. You can create several
lists, each containing specific contacts, with a specific name.
Example: One list can be configured to notify response personnel (notif1),
while another contacts employees (notif3).
Emails
Equation
Add Clicking displays the Input dialog box; allowing you to define a specific name
for a list. Once you have defined a list name, the name displays in the list
pull-down. You can create the list names first, then configure email
addresses at a later date.
Rename Clicking displays the Input dialog box; allowing you to change the name of
the list name displayed in the notification list text box.
Delete Clicking allows you to delete the list name and associated addresses
displayed in the notification list text box.
All addresses associated with a list are displayed here.
Edit Selecting an email address from the Emails list box then clicking the Edit
button, displays the Email configuration dialog box. The Email
configuration dialog box allows you to Add, Rename or Delete an address;
test an address; enable the notification; send a message when an Alert
clears; define a time-range for the email notification, or add additional
comments to be included with the email notification.
Equations associated with an email address are displayed here.
Edit Selecting an email address from the Emails list box then clicking the Edit
button displays the Create equation dialog box; allowing you to define a
logical equation associated with the email address. This allows you to
configure specific instances or parameters used when sending email
notifications.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 81
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Understanding the General Configuration
Dialog Box
You can configure the TWX300 Display, Alarm parameters, maps and
layers, data sources, Density parameters, Identify parameters, Email,
ASCII output, and associated options using this dialog box. Select one
of five tabs to view, change or define Display parameters.
Displaying the General
Configuration Dialog Box
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select Tools > Configuration.
The Password dialog box displays.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The General Configuration dialog box
displays. See Figure 31 below.
Figure 27
NOTE
General Configuration Dialog Box
When displayed, current settings and definitions are viewable. If an
option is grayed-out, it is either not available, or the wrong password
may have been entered.
82 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Four buttons (common on most TWX300 dialog boxes) located at the
bottom of the dialog box let you control how modifications to the
Configuration file are handled. A description of the buttons and their
associated functions are described in Table 18 below.
Table 18
General Configuration Dialog Box—Common
Buttons
Button
Function
Click to save the current modifications to the configuration
and leaves the dialog box displayed.
Click to save the current modifications to the configuration
and exit the dialog box.
Click to close the dialog box without saving or changing any
modifications.
Click to display the TWX300 Help file.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 83
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Using the General Tab
The General tab (Figure 28 on page 84) contains fields and options for
selecting and defining various configuration parameters pertaining to:
- TWX300 System configuration and licensing
- Archive path location and functions
- Map projections and geosets
- Alarm configuration
Displaying the General Tab
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select Tools > Configuration.
The Password dialog box displays.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The General Configuration dialog box
displays.
4.
Click the General tab. See Figure 28 below.
Figure 28
NOTE
General Tab
If an option is grayed-out, it is either not available, or the wrong password may have been entered
84 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Table 19 below describes General tab panels along with panel and
button functions. Windows 7 may use different paths.
Table 19
Panel Field or Button
Configuration
General Tab—Functions
Function
Displays the Configuration filename currently being
used.
Click to display dialog boxes allowing you to change the
password.
Licenses
Licensed options Lists enabled licensed TWX300 options.
Latitude range Displays the Latitude range of the enabled Data and
ASCII Output regions.
Longitude range Displays the Longitude range of the enabled Data and
ASCII Output regions.
Archive
Archive path Displays the path where Archive files are kept. Enter a
new path to change paths.
Backup path Displays the path where Backup files are kept. Enter a
new path to change paths.
Limit number of archived files Check to limit the number of files kept in the Archive
directory. Limited by available free hard drive space.
Number of days kept in archive Number of days that an Archive file is maintained in the
Archive directory. Limited by available free hard drive
space.
Map
Distance units
Select a unit of measure for units of distance. The unit
type selected is used for all calculations and dialog
boxes.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 85
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Table 19
Panel
Field or Button
General Tab—Functions (Continued)
Function
Click to display the Choose Projection dialog box;
allowing you to change map projections.
Click to display the Geoset dialog box; allowing you to
change map geosets.
Click to display the Layer Control dialog box; allowing
you to change and configure map layers.
Click to display the Region Style dialog box to set/define
the styles used for Clear warnings when displayed over
the Area Map.
Click to display the Region Style dialog box to set/define
the styles used for In Alert warnings when displayed
over the Area Map.
Alarm
86 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Using the Connections Tab
The Connections tab (Figure 29 on page 88) contains fields and options
for selecting and defining connection parameters:
- Define which type of Central data for TWX300 to use (LP Type 96,
LP Type 97, or Secondary)
- Define the Primary source using the named Server or IP address of
the data source (terminal server connected to a satellite receiver, a
PuTTy connection, VLDS, or an LP/CP)
- Port on Primary source where data can be found
- Define grouping parameters for IC events
- Define EFM filtering mode
- View configured EFM names, host ID, port number used, and if the
EFM is enabled
- Set the EFM Enhancement Factor
- Define the RADS connection
- Define the Relays connection
Displaying the Connections Tab
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select Tools > Configuration.
The Password dialog box displays.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The General Configuration dialog box
displays.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 87
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
4.
Click the Connections tab. See Figure 29 below.
Figure 29
NOTE
Connections Tab
If an option is grayed-out, it is either not available, or the wrong password may have been entered.
88 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Table 20 below describes Connection tab panels along with panel and
button functions.
Table 20
Panel Field or Button
Central
Data type
Primary source
Grouping
Connections Tab—Functions
Function
Select the type of data input for the TWX300 system.
Define the following Connection items: Host IP number
(data source), Host port number, NLDN address.
NOTE: You may want to gather the information above
from IT personnel prior to beginning the Connections
configuration.
The text entered in the Site name text box allows you to
add an extension to archive files. For example, if you
added the entered BOS in the text box, all archived files
would display the BOS extension. If the text box is left
blank, the default extension of .bin is used. This is
useful in tagging a file to easily determine its origin. A
six-character maximum is enforced.
NOTE: Enter no more than six letters in the text box.
Use only alpha numeric values. No spaces or " ’ ", " / ",
etc.
Select from None or Branch.
This option is available only if Secondary data is
selected in the Data Type panel.
None-No attempt is made by TWX300 software to
connect the nodes in IC events.
Branch-TWX300 software connects IC nodes with a
line or lines; depicting the structure of the cloud flash
using the values entered in DT Max and Dist. Max.
DT Max This option is available only if Secondary data is
selected in the Data Type panel.
Default is 5000. The value entered sets the time delta
between events. The system will not attempt to connect
two nodes in a flash that have a time delta greater (in
100 microseconds) than the value entered.
NOTE: Vaisala recommends that you accept and use
the default value, as this value has been validated by
Vaisala research engineers.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 89
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Table 20
Panel
Field or Button
Connections Tab—Functions (Continued)
Function
Dist. Max This option is available only if Secondary data is
selected in the Data Type panel.
Default is 12 kilometers. The value entered sets the
maximum distance between two nodes of a flash. The
system will not attempt to connect two nodes that are
farther apart (in distance) than the value entered.
NOTE: Vaisala recommends that you accept and use
the default value, as this value has been validated by
Vaisala research engineers.
RADS
Server Check option to enable TWX300 act as a server
listening port for multiple RADS.
Host Enter the Host IP address for RADS.
Port Enter the Port number used by RADS.
Relays
Host Enter the Host IP address for the Relays.
Port Enter the Port number used for the Relays.
EFMs
EFM filtering mode
EFM list
Name
Enabled
Host
Select Highest values to use the absolute highest
value recorded in one-second, as the filter.
Select Median values to use the median value
recorded in one-second, as the filter.
Properly configured EFMs, along with their associated
name and number, is displayed in list format. You can
view the selected EFMs current configuration, or you
can configure the selected EFM using the options in the
EFMs panel.
Enter a name to be used by the selected EFM.
Select option to enable a selected EFM. Recheck to
disable the selected EFM.
Enter the Host IP address for the EFM.
90 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Table 20
Panel
Connections Tab—Functions (Continued)
Field or Button
Function
Port Enter the Port number for the EFM.
Enhancement factor Refer to your EFM II User's Guide for information on
EFM enhancement factors.
Using the Density Tab
The Density tab (Figure 30 on page 92) contains fields and options for
selecting and defining various configuration parameters pertaining to:
- Position and size of Density map
- Density Mesh properties
- Density calculation time
NOTE
Settings defined in this panel are directly tied to the Legend when in
Density mode.
Displaying the Density Tab
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select Tools > Configuration.
The Password dialog box displays.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The General Configuration dialog box
displays.
4.
Click the Density tab. See Figure 30 below.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 91
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Figure 30
NOTE
Density Tab
If an option is grayed-out, it is either not available, or the wrong password may have been entered
Table 21 below describes Density tab panels along with panel and
button functions.
Table 21
Panel Field or Button
Position & size
Density Tab—Functions
Function
Center latitude Enter the coordinates (lat.) of the center of the area you
want to perform Density calculations for, or your
authorized area.
Center longitude Enter the coordinates (lon.) of the center of the area you
want to perform Density calculations for, or your
authorized area.
Width in kilometers Enter a value representing the approximate width of the
area you want to perform Density calculations for, or
your authorized area.
Height in kilometers Enter a value representing the approximate height of the
area you want to perform Density calculations for, or
your authorized area.
Layer height Enter a value between 500 to 10000. Only used for 3D
Total Lightning.
92 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Table 21
Panel Field or Button
Mesh properties
Density Tab—Functions (Continued)
Function
Use flash multiplicity If you receive Flash data, the Multiplicity property
indicate the number of strokes for the same flash. So if
you check this check box you will compute the stroke
density instead of the flash density. NOTE: You can
discard this value if you receive stroke data.
Square side size Size of the grid boxes used in calculating Density
values.
Unit Size unit of measurement for square sides used in
calculating Density values.
Calculation time
Refresh period length Enter a value between 10 to 3600, in seconds. This
defines how often Density values are recalculated.
Example: In the illustration above, values entered force
TWX300 to recalculate every 60 seconds, and the
calculations include the last 10-minutes (10 X 60) of
Density data.
Number of refresh periods Enter a value of 1 or greater. This defines the number of
refresh periods used in recalculations.
Example one: In the illustration above, the values
entered in the text boxes, force TWX300 to recalculate
Density values every 60-seconds. Calculations would
include the last 10-minutes (10 X 60) of Density data.
Example two: If the values entered were 120 for the
RPL, and the NRP were 10, this would force TWX300 to
recalculate Density values every 120-seconds.
Calculations would include the last 20-minutes (120 X
10) of Density data.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 93
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Using the Identify Tab
By selecting the Identify tab (Figure 31 on page 94), you can view,
define, or elect to change reporting parameters listed by Inspector for
the following lightning data:
- IC lightning
- IC node
- CG lightning
- Total Lightning
Displaying the Identify Tab
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select Tools > Configuration.
The Password dialog box displays.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The General Configuration dialog box
displays.
4.
Click the Identify tab. See Figure 31 below.
Figure 31
NOTE
Identify Tab
If an option is grayed-out, it is either not available, or the wrong password may have been entered.
94 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Table 22 below describes Identify tab panels along with panel and
button functions.
Table 22
Panel
Name
Field or Button
Identify Tab—Functions
Function
Name The name of the item selected from the Intra cloud,
Intra cloud node, Cloud to ground or Total lightning
column fields displays here.
Unit The unit of measurement for the selected column item
displays here.
Visible Select the option to make the selected column item
display in the Inspector window. Each item you want to
display as a reporting item in the Inspector window must
be selected here.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 95
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Using the Others Tab
- By selecting the Others tab (Figure 32 on page 96) you can view,
define, or elect to change, the following parameters:
- ASCII output (licensed feature)
- Email notification (email server configuration)
- Miscellaneous items including: Sounds (New Event), time display,
new event highlight, proportional font intensity values, etc.
- Save image paths, format, and time period (licensed feature)
Displaying the Others Tab
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select Tools > Configuration.
The Password dialog box displays.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The General Configuration dialog box
displays.
4.
Click the Others tab. See Figure 32 below.
Figure 32
NOTE
Others Tab
If an option is grayed-out, it is either not available, or the wrong password may have been entered.
96 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Table 23 below describes Others tab panels along with panel and
button functions.
Table 23
Others Tab—Functions
Panel, Button or Icon Field or Button
ASCII output (licensed feature)
Email notification
Purpose
Enabled Select to enable ASCII output feature. Allows
ASCII output from the TWX300 system.
Listening port Enter port number. This is the Port that the
TWX300 will place the ASCII data.
Format US format is only for the Northern
hemisphere. World format includes time
precision to ms (.0000 sec.); and adds a
space for an '-' symbol in front of the latitude
number. This permits data in the Southern
hemisphere to be reported
Permits Email notification from the TWX300
system. You must first configure the TWX300
Email in this tab before attempting to
configure Email notification on Warning Areas
in the Area Definition dialog box.
SMTP host Enter IP address of SMTP host
Address Enter the return address for TWX300 Email.
Must be of a valid format, recognized by the
SMTP server.
Username Enter a username for SMTP host if the SMTP
host requires one.
Password Enter the password for the SMTP host if the
SMTP host requires one.
Miscellaneous
Coordinate in DMS Select to enable lat. and lon. data to be
displayed in degrees, minutes, and seconds.
If unchecked, lat. and lon. data is displayed in
decimal degrees (default).
Display UTC time Select to display data in UTC time, converted
from local PC time. Unchecked displays data
in local PC time.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 97
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Table 23
Others Tab—Functions (Continued)
Panel, Button or Icon Field or Button
Purpose
New event highlight Select to enable TWX300 to highlight the
latest event on the Display.
New event sound Select to enable a sound to be played when
TWX300 places a new event on the Display.
The default sound is thunder.wav located in
the sound directory and may be replaced with
a custom sound (the filename must be the
same).
Proportional font The system is capable of displaying
intensity max proportional event symbols (fonts) whose
display size is proportional to the intensity of
the lightning event. Enter a value up to
1000kA. The larger font size is used to
represent the value entered.
Automatic image
Configure the TWX300 system to
save (licensed feature)
automatically save a graphic image file of the
current TWX300 Display to a defined location.
Enabled Select to enable the Automatic image save
option.
Format Select: .GIF, .JPEG, .BMP, .TIF, .PNG, or .PS
output format. This is the format of the
automatically generated image files.
Period Enter a value between 10 to 3600 in seconds.
This defines how often an image is saved to a
file.
NOTE: This text box is grayed-out when the
Auto-cycle zoom synch. option is selected.
Auto-cycle zoom sync. Selecting causes a new screen shot to be
taken whenever a predefined zoom cycles.
The Auto-cycle zoom and Automatic image
save functions are synchronized. Images are
saved to the path displayed in the Automatic
image save panel.
NOTE: When this option is selected, the
Period option is grayed-out; avoiding
confusion in defining time periods. The time
period defined for the Auto-cycle zoom
function is overridden when Auto-cycle zoom
synch. is selected.
98 __________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Table 23
Others Tab—Functions (Continued)
Panel, Button or Icon Field or Button
Purpose
Display mode Select Discharges to automatically generate
image files when in Density mode. The
Automatic image save option must be
enabled first.
Select Density to automatically generate
image files when in Density mode. The
Automatic image save option must be
enabled first.
Discharges path & name Saved Discharges image file location. Accept
the default, or enter a new location for
automatically generated image files.
Density path & name Saved Density image file location. Accept the
default, or enter a new location for
automatically generated image files.
Default recommended. Enter the format to be
used when saving image files. Refer to Image
Filenames—Format on page 222 for details.
Lat and Lon Boxes—DMS Option
The Area Definition dialog box text and text boxes used to enter Lat.
and Lon. values, will display differently depending on whether the
Coordinate in DMS option is selected in the General Configuration
> Others tab, Miscellaneous panel. See Figure 33 below for detail.
DMS option selected
Figure 33
DMS option not selected
Coordinate in DMS Option
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 99
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Understanding Inspector
The Inspector dialog box allows you to get information on selected
lightning data. Once an event is displayed over the Area Map, select
that event to display Inspector which offers more specific information
regarding the selected event. The types of information provided by
Inspector changes, depending upon the event type selected.
Items in the Inspector dialog box can be customized in the General
Configuration dialog box, Identify tab.
NOTE
Inspector displays only when viewing data selected with the Identify
tool
.
Displaying the Inspector Dialog Box
1.
In the TWX300 toolbar, click
mode
. The cursor goes into Identify
.
2.
Left-click on an event. The Inspector dialog box displays. See
Figure 34 below.
3.
If more than one event was selected (as indicated in the top-most
line of the dialog box), use the drop-down list box, and Up and
Down arrows, to select an individual event.
4.
Obtain pertinent information from the Inspector dialog box (or
the drop-down list box as needed).
5.
Click the Windows Close button to complete the operation and
return to the Display.
Number of events located (selected
from pull-down)
Lat/Lon of selected event(s)
Date and time of selected event
Figure 34
Inspector Dialog Box
100 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Defining Inspector Window
Parameters
1.
Display the General Configuration dialog box.
2.
Click the Identify tab.
3.
Based on the type of lightning data you have selected in the
General Configuration dialog box, General tab, select a
parameter listed under the lightning data type list box.
The selected parameter name displays in the Name text box.
The unit of measurement used by Inspector for the parameter
selected, is displayed in the Unit text box.
4.
Check the Visible check box to make the parameter visible in the
Inspector window.
5.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 until you have selected all the
parameters you want displayed by Inspector for a particular
lightning data type.
6.
Click Save & Exit to save the changes, and to return to the
Display.
.
NOTE
For a comprehensive listing of available parameter types, refer to
Appendix A, Inspector Parameters, on page 297.
NOTE
The SAFIR Control Module (SCM) uses all six Discrimination values
(0 through 5), Type 97 uses IC and CG data and Discrimination values
of 0 and 4, Type 96 uses CG data only and a Discrimination value of 4.
The Discrimination value can be obtained by viewing the archive file
of an event.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 101
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
No Lightning Found by
Inspector—Message
If you select an area where no lightning data is detected, a message to
that effect displays, as illustrated in Figure 35 below.
- Click OK to close the message box, and return to the Display.
Figure 35
Nothing Found by Inspector—Message
102 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Understanding the Map Legend
The Legend dialog box uses color-coding to display the total timeperiod length. The user-selectable time-period is divided into six
segments; with each time-period using a unique and user-configured
color.
The colors used for lightning display and the colors used in the TimeLapse Histogram are identical (as defined in the Legend). These colors
provide a visual indication as to the age of the lightning data on the
Display. Refer to Figure 36 below for detail.
Figure 36
Legend Dialog Box
The Legend changes in appearance and function as needed, when in
either of the following Display Modes:
- Discharges
- Density
The map Legend dialog box allows you to define how data is displayed
and aged by (depending on the Display mode selected):
- Setting the Time-period length.
- Viewing the center coordinate of the area of the displayed map area.
- Changing the colors used in displaying lightning data over the Area
Map.
- Changing the colors used in displaying lightning data to gradients
and back to solid.
It is highly recommended that you read Appendix C, Data Aging, on
page 309 for a detailed explanation of data aging versus time-period
length.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 103
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Map Legend Display Modes
Enabling Density Display Mode
- In the TWX300 toolbar, click
mode. See Figure 37 below.
Figure 37
. The map Legend enters Density
Map Legend—Density Mode
Table 24 below describes map Legend functions in Density mode.
Table 24
Button or Panel
Map Legend—Density Mode Functions
Purpose
Select the Mesh size used in displaying Density. Basic square size. This value is
tied to the Mesh Size defined in the General Configuration dialog box, Density
tab.
Levels number—Represents the number of colors used in the Legend. From 1 to
16.
Max—The highest value displayed by the Legend. All values higher are
represented by the highest color.
Linear—Selecting enables Legend values from 0 to Max to be computed using a
linear ramp.
Log—Selecting enables Legend values from 0 to Max to be computed using a
logarithmic ramp.
User defined—Selecting enables Legend values from 0 to Max to be defined by
manually setting values.
Transparency—Set the transparency factor of the density layer. From 0
(transparent, invisible) to 255 (opaque). This command is used to make the
density translucent in order to see and determine what is underneath.
104 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Table 24
Button or Panel
Map Legend—Density Mode Functions (Continued)
Purpose
Legend uses color-coding to display Density values.
Example: As illustrated in the figure at left, the Density color key comprised of the
time between 0.0625 and 0.1250 disch/km2/min is displayed in light green.
Displays the center coordinates of the displayed map area.
Toggle to expand or contract the map Legend. Refer to the TWX300 Display
Installation and Configuration guide for other use.
Click to change map Legend color keys to a gradient.
Click to undo the last color change or action. A second click reverts to the colors
defined in the Configuration file.
Enabling Discharges Display Mode
- In the TWX300 toolbar, click
. The map Legend enters
Discharges mode. See Figure 38 below.
Figure 38
Map Legend—Discharges Mode
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 105
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Table 25 below describes map Legend functions in Discharges mode.
Table 25
Button or Panel
Map Legend—Discharge Mode Functions
Purpose
Set the Time-period length used in Discharge calculations. The Time-period
length selected, determines how long the flash is kept in a specific time period
(color key).
Selecting the Highlight cloud to ground option enables the Display to draw
IC data with more transparency than CG data; making CG data more visible.
The transparency of the CG layer is set by the Transparency factor.
Use to define transparency or opacity for IC vs. CG data. Making one stand
out more than the other.
When the Highlight cloud to ground option is not selected, set the
transparency factor of the discharge layer. From 0 (transparent, invisible) to
255 (opaque).
When the Highlight cloud to ground option is selected, set the transparency
factor for the CG layer. From 0 (only IC are visible) to 255 (only CG data is
visible).
Map Legend color keys—Display the event in the color selected to represent
specific time periods of lightning activity in the TWX300 Display. These colors
provide a visual indication as to the age of the lightning data on the TWX300
Display. Refer to Appendix C, Data Aging, on page 309 for detail.
Displays the center coordinates of the displayed map area.
Toggle to expand or contract the map Legend. Refer to the TWX300 Display
Installation and Configuration guide for other use.
Click to change map Legend color keys to a gradient.
Click to revert map Legend colors keys to solid.
Displaying the Map Legend
Method One
- In the TWX300 toolbar, select
displays.
. The Legend dialog box
106 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Method Two
- From the TWX300 Main menu, select View > Legend. The Legend
dialog box displays.
Expanding the Legend Dialog Box
See Figure 39 below for detail.
Method One
- With the Legend dialog box displayed, click
dialog box expands.
. The Legend
Method Two
- Roll the mouse cursor over the Legend dialog box. The Legend
dialog box expands.
Contracting the Legend Dialog Box
See Figure 39 below for detail.
Method One
- With the Legend dialog box displayed and expanded, click
Legend dialog box contracts.
Figure 39
. The
Legend Dialog Box—Expanded and Contracted
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 107
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Changing Map Legend Colors
TWX300 allows you to configure the colors used for the Display to
best suit your needs. These colors are used in the display of lightning
data, the Histogram, and the Legend.
1.
With the Legend dialog box displayed, click on the color you
want to change. The Color dialog box displays.
Figure 40
Map Legend Color Keys
2.
From the colors displayed in the Basic colors palette, choose a
new color by clicking on it.
3.
Click OK to close the Color dialog box and accept the new color.
The new color is displayed in the Legend, Histogram, and event
symbols displayed over the Area Map.
Defining Custom Map Legend Colors
TWX300 allows you to define and use custom colors. Refer to your
Operating System manual or guide for information on creating and
saving custom Windows colors.
108 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Understanding the Monitor Window
The Monitor window displays a histogram of the count of IC and CG
activity for each time period in a selected Warning Area, separated into
three unique columns. A Warning Area is selected for monitoring by
using the Area drop-down list in the Monitor window. See Figure 41
below.
Lightning counts are distributed along the vertical axis (Y-axis), while
time is distributed along the horizontal axis (X-axis). By default,
Positive cloud-to-ground counts are displayed in a red column;
Negative cloud-to-ground counts are displayed in a green column;
while Intra-cloud counts are displayed in a blue column. The count
for the represented time period is displayed at the top of the column.
Total lightning counts are displayed at the bottom left of the Monitor
window.
Figure 41
Monitor Window
The time Monitor, used to distribute lightning data, is set by the Timeperiod length selection in the Map Legend dialog box. The Monitor
window automatically adjusts in size depending on the total amount of
lightning detected for the time period.
NOTE
Counts are determined over six time zones, and mirrors the colorcoded time periods used in the Histogram and map Legend. For example, if a time zone is set to 10 minutes, counts are determined over six
ten-minute periods, with each bar of the histogram representing a 10minute time period.
The Monitor window allows you to:
- Select an Area (Warning Area) to monitor.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 109
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
- Determine total Positive and Negative CG counts based on time for
a selected Area.
- Determine total IC counts based on time for a selected Area.
- Determine Total counts for a selected Area.
Displaying the Monitor Window
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select View > Monitor. The
Monitor displays over the Area Map.
2.
Using the Area drop-down list box, select the Warning Area you
want monitored.
3.
Observe the Total counts tally for an indication of the Total
lightning counts (bottom left) for the selected area, or above each
column for the selected time period.
Total counts for Positive cloud-to-ground, Negative cloud-toground, and Intra-cloud are displayed as well (above Total
counts).
4.
Click the Windows Close button to complete the operation and
return to the Display.
Understanding the Time-Lapse Histogram
The Histogram is a colorized bar graph that visualizes the frequency
and distribution of events. The height of a colored bar is proportional
to the number of events displayed for that time period, and represents
all the lightning on the Display. Each color represents the total IC and
CG lightning for that time period.
Figure 42
TWX300 Time-Lapse Histogram
Legend color = "n" minute segments; where n = the value of the Time
Period length defined in the Legend drop-down. The right-most
column is the current "n" minute period.
- The Histogram can be repositioned at any of the four corners of the
Display.
110 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
- The data presented is relative to the lightning events on the Display.
- The colors displayed in the Histogram mimic those selected in the
Legend dialog box.
Displaying the Time-Lapse
Histogram
Method One
- From the TWX300 toolbar, click . The Histogram displays in the
lower left corner of the Area Map (default location).
Method Two
- From the TWX300 Main menu, select View > Time Lapse
Histogram. The Histogram displays in the lower left corner of the
Area Map (default location).
Relocating the Histogram
By default, the Histogram is located in the lower left-most portion of
the Display. However, you can change the position by performing the
following:
1.
Place the mouse cursor inside the Histogram.
2.
Right-click the mouse. The Change Position option displays as
illustrated in Figure 43 below.
Figure 43
3.
Changing Histogram Position
Left-click the mouse on Change Position. The Histogram
changes position to the upper left-most portion of the Display.
Repeat Steps 1 through 3 until you relocate the Histogram where
you want it placed. With each consecutive click, the Histogram is
repositioned in a clock-wise manner, and is always positioned in
a corner of the Display. It cannot be positioned in the middle of
the Display.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________ 111
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
View Histogram Data as a Line
Graph
The line graph displays all events in the licensed Data Region, not just
the display area; and is refreshed every 30-seconds.
1.
Place the mouse cursor inside the Histogram.
2.
Right-click the mouse. The Line graph option displays.
3.
Click Line graph. The line graph displays as illustrated in
Figure 44 below.
Figure 44
Viewing a Line Graph of Histogram Data
Using the Information Window
The Information window displays messages sent to you by the
TWX300 system. Note message area in Figure 45 below. Information
types include:
- Warning Areas In Alert
- Warning Areas in Clear
- Changes to Alerts status of configured Warning Areas
- Error messages (Email)
Figure 45
Information Window
112 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 3 ___________________________________________ Understanding the TWX300 Interface
Viewing Messages
Once Information is received, the message is displayed briefly in the
Message Area, replacing the three red dots. Messages display on the
list in the order received. Refer to Figure 46 below for detail.
Figure 46
Information Window—Message
Translucent Information Window
Because the Information windows displays as necessary and stays on
top, this window may be toggled from opaque (default), to translucent;
allowing you to view Display data while messages display.
NOTE
The translucent window may not be available when using remote
screen software.
To display (toggle) the translucent Information window:
- If displayed, click
in the window. The window displays as
translucent as illustrated in Figure 47 below.
- Click again to toggle the window to default.
Figure 47
Information Window—Translucent
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________113
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
This page intentionally left blank.
114 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________ TWX300 Area Map
CHAPTER 4
TWX300 AREA MAP
Understanding the Area Map
The Area Map displayed by Thunderstorm Warning System represents
your Licensed Data Region, and provides the background over which
lightning data is displayed. Area Maps are initially created by the
Vaisala technical staff for each particular system. You can create
unique regional Warning Areas and have the option to display a grid
over the map. See Figure 48 on page 117 and Figure 50 on page 119.
The system displays Central data on a map using the latitude/longitude
coordinates of the data and a time period color code. The default map
projection is Mercator.
By clicking the appropriate Thunderstorm Warning System toolbar
buttons, the following actions can be performed on the Area Map:
- Printing
- Selecting a specific lightning event for specific information
- Zooming
- Panning
- Obtaining map distance and bearing between points
- Creating and accessing a predefined zoom view (unique views of
the Area Map can be configured and saved for viewing at a later
date)
- Zooming to the extents of your subscribed area
- Enabling and disabling the map grid
- Displaying a Histogram of lightning events
- Displaying the Legend dialog box for determining event age
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________115
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Map Features
Depending on the map geoset and resolution (zoom factor) the
following items may be displayed over the Area Map:
- Country boundary lines
- State or provincial boundary lines
- State or provincial capitol names
- County lines and name
- City names for larger cities
- Interstate highways
See Figure 48 on page 117.
Changing the Area Map
Although you may change geosets or map layers, and can move freely
around the map displayed, you cannot change or reconfigure the Area
Map itself due to licensing restrictions. Contact Technical Support for
information on changing Area Maps.
Map Grid Lines
Lines representing lines of latitude and longitude can be displayed over
the Area Map.
NOTE
Grid lines representing lines of Latitude and Longitude are drawn only
for even-numbered lines, and every 15 degrees. If your viewing area is
relatively small in size and falls in-between the drawn grid lines, you
will not see lines of Latitude and Longitude. Using other geosets it is
possible to create a map layer with "tighter" grid lines.
Grid lines representing lines of Latitude and Longitude are drawn only
for even-numbered lines, and every 15 degrees (refer to Figure 48 on
page 117). If your viewing area is relatively small in size, and falls inbetween the drawn grid lines, you will not see lines of Latitude and
Longitude.
116 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________ TWX300 Area Map
NOTE
The Map Grid must be included as a layer of the selected geoset. The
grid15.dat, grid15.id, grid15.map and grid15.tab files must reside
in the \tab\grid directory.
Using other geosets, it is possible to create or view a tighter map grid
(closer lines of Latitude and Longitude), or you can create your own.
Refer to the MapInfo and MapX website(s) for information.
Figure 48
Map Grid Displayed Over the Area Map
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________117
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Displaying the Map Grid
Method One
- In the Thunderstorm Warning System toolbar, click
Grid displays over the Area Map.
. The Map
Method Two
- From the Thunderstorm Warning System menu, select View > Grid
Visible. The Map Grid displays over the Area Map.
Map Scale Bar
The Map Scale Bar (Figure 49 below) provides a tool used in
referencing lightning data in relation to real world space. The Scale
Bar automatically adjusts to the displayed map scale (while zooming in
and out) and the unit of measurement defined in the Units panel, of the
General Configuration dialog box, General tab.
Displaying the Map Scale Bar
Method One
- In the Thunderstorm Warning System toolbar, click
Grid displays over the Area Map.
. The Map
Method Two
- From the Thunderstorm Warning System menu, select View > Scale
Bar. The Map Grid displays over the Area Map.
Figure 49
Map Scale Bar
118 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________ TWX300 Area Map
Understanding Map Layers
Map Layers
Think of map layers as transparencies where each layer contains a
different part of the map. The layers are stacked one on top of the other
and allow you to see all aspects of the map at the same time. See Figure
50 below.
NOTE
Changes made using Layer Control are not saved. Permanent changes
to the Geoset, with regards to the colors used by Thunderstorm
Warning System, can be accomplished by using the MapInfo Geoset
Manager. The location (Windows 7 may have a different path) of the
file is:
C:\Program Files\MapInfo\MapX 5.0\GeosetManager50.exe.
Refer to the MapInfo website for greater detail.
Figure 50
Typical Area Map—Washington D.C Area
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________119
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Along with the standard layer types, unique user layers may also be
added. Items could include roadways, demographic data, service lines,
etc.
Using the Layer Control Dialog Box
Along with the standard layer types, unique user layers may also be
added. Items could include roadways, demographic data, service lines,
etc. This dialog box allows you to configure which layers are displayed
along with their attributes. See Figure 51 below.
Figure 51
Layer Control Dialog Box
Table 26 below describes the various panels and options in the Layer
Control dialog box.
Table 26
Layer Control Dialog Box Items
Button or Option
Layers
Function
Layers list List of available layers associated with map.
Up Select to move the selected layer Up the list one
increment in the priority list.
120 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________ TWX300 Area Map
Table 26
Layer Control Dialog Box Items (Continued)
Button or Option
Function
Down Select to move the selected layer Down the list
one increment in the priority list.
Add Click to display the Open dialog box, allowing you
to select a new table (layer) to Add to the Layers
list box.
Remove Click to Remove the selected layer from the
Layers list box and geoset.
Properties
Visible Select to make the selected layer Visible, or not,
on the Area Map.
Selectable Select to make the selected layer Selectable by
the mouse pointer.
Automatic Labels Select to produce Automatic Labels for cities,
states, provinces, etc.
Editable Select to make the selected layer Editable.
Display Click to display the Display Properties dialog box,
permitting you to change map display properties
including: Styles, Zoom Layering, and to show
specific line attributes. See Layer Properties
section below.
Labels Click to display the Label Properties dialog box,
permitting you to change map label properties
including: Styles, Visibility and Position. See Layer
Properties section below.
Displaying the Layer Control Dialog Box
1.
From the Thunderstorm Warning System Main menu, select
Tools > Configuration. The Password dialog box displays.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The General Configuration dialog box
displays.
4.
In the Map panel, click Manage Layers. The Layer Control
dialog box displays.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 121
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Managing Map Layers and
Properties
You can reorder map layers so that a particular layer is on top. Any
options not available to you are grayed-out.
1.
From the Thunderstorm Warning System Main menu, select
Tools > Configuration. The Enter Password dialog box
displays.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The General Configuration dialog box
displays.
4.
Click the General tab.
5.
Click Manage Layers. The Layer Control dialog box displays.
Available layers are listed in the Layers box.
6.
Select a map layer from the Layers list box. Specific layer
properties are displayed in the Properties panel.
To move the selected layer up in the list order, click Up.
To move the selected layer down in the list order, click Down.
To delete the selected layer from the list, click Remove.
7.
To add a layer to the list, click Add. The Open dialog box
displays. Using the appropriate path (Windows 7 may have a
different path), usually C:\Program Files\MapInfo\Maps,
locate and select the Layers file and click Open. The new layer
displays in the Layers box.
8.
Set layer property options in the Properties panel.
9.
Set layer display options by clicking Display in the Properties
panel.
10.
Set the layer label options by clicking Labels in the Properties
panel.
11.
Click OK to accept the changes and close the dialog box.
122 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________ TWX300 Area Map
CAUTION
Any changes made in layer control are not saved. Permanent changes
to the Geoset, with regard to the colors used by Thunderstorm
Warning System, can be accomplished by using the MapInfo Geoset
Manager. The location (Windows 7 may have a different path) of the
file is C:\Program Files\MapInfo\GeosetManager50.exe.
Refer to the MapInfo website for greater detail.
NOTE
The order in which layers are placed mandates the manner in which
the layers are displayed and accessed. Some layers are not visible until
you are zoomed in quite close. This is controlled by the Min Zoom
and Max Zoom parameters in the Zoom Layering panel, of the
Display Properties dialog box.
Map Layer Order
Map layers in a Layers collection display in increasing index order.
The bottom layer is drawn first and the top layer is drawn last. It is
important to order your layers correctly. If the layers are incorrectly
ordered in the Layers collection, the layer you want to view may be
obscured by another.
Example: One layer may contain country boundaries, a second layer
may have symbols that represent capitals, and a third layer might
consist of highways. Laying these transparencies one on top of the
other builds a complete map.
You can reorder how layers are displayed in a Map window. From the
Layers list select the layer you want to reorder. Choose either the Up or
Down button to move the layer(s) to a position above or below its
current position. Layer order is also important when you use
(the
Select tool). The Select tool selects objects from the topmost selectable
layer. If you have several objects at the same location, it is difficult to
select the exact one you want. You can reorder your layers so that the
layer you want to select from is the new topmost layer.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 123
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Reorder Map Layers
You can reorder map layers so that a particular layer is on top. Any
options not available to you are grayed-out.
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select Tools > Configuration.
The Enter Password dialog box displays.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The General Configuration dialog box
displays.
4.
Click the General tab.
5.
Click Manage Layers. The Layer Control dialog box displays.
Available layers are listed in the Layers box.
6.
Select a map layer from the Layers list box. Specific layer
properties are displayed in the Properties panel.
To move the selected layer up in the list order, click Up.
To move the selected layer down in the list order, click Down.
To delete the selected layer from the list, click Remove.
CAUTION
7.
To add a layer to the list, click Add. The Open dialog box
displays. Using the appropriate path (Windows 7 may have a
different path), usually C:\Program Files\MapInfo\Maps,
locate and select the layers file and click Open. The new layer
displays in the Layers box.
8.
Set layer property options in the Properties panel.
9.
Set layer display options by clicking Display in the Properties
panel.
10.
Set the layer label options by clicking Labels in the Properties
panel.
11.
Click OK to accept the changes and close the dialog box.
If using MapX v5.02.19 or older, do not change default line styles on
any map layers. Refer to the ReadMe.txt file on the TWX300
Installation CD.
124 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________ TWX300 Area Map
Map Layer Properties
The Properties panel enables you to customize the display for each
layer in a Map window. In the Layer Control dialog box, you can select
a layer and click on the Display button to bring up the Display
Properties dialog. See Figure 52 on page 126. Inside the dialog box
you can change the default styles for the layer and set the zoom at
which a layer displays.
When you first open a map, boundaries, lines, points, and text are all
displayed using defaults in the map’s Geoset file. You can change how
objects display by using the Display Mode panel of the Display
Properties dialog box.
Thunderstorm Warning System displays the override buttons that are
appropriate for the type of objects in the layer.
Example: If the layer contains streets, a Line Style Override button
displays. Clicking it displays the Line Style dialog box where you can
change the width, and color of the streets. Suppose that you want to
change the display of streets to a blue line. In the Layer Control dialog
box, choose the street layer and click the Display button. This displays
the Display Options dialog box. Click to place a check mark, in the
Override Style box to activate the Override Style button (large gray
button).
For boundary layers, the Override Style button displays the Region
Style dialog box where you can change both the fill and borders of
boundaries. Use the Symbol Style dialog to override the style for layers
containing symbols or points.
The Style Override is only in effect during the current work session, as
are the other display settings. To make changes permanent, you need to
modify the Geoset using the application located at C:\Program
Files\MapInfo\MapX5.0\GeosetManager50.exe. Windows 7 may
have a different path.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 125
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Figure 52
NOTE
Display Properties Dialog Box
The Min Zoom and Max Zoom values in the Display Properties
dialog box, define the level of zoom needed for the layer to display or
disappear. If the zoom level stays within the values entered, the layer
displays.
Accessing the Display Properties Dialog Box
1.
From the Thunderstorm Warning System Main menu, select the
Tools > Configuration menu item.
2.
Click the General tab.
3.
Click
displays.
4.
After you have selected a layer, click
Properties dialog box displays.
. The Layer Control dialog box
. The Display
126 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________ TWX300 Area Map
Map Label Properties
As attributes, labels are dynamically connected to their map objects. If
the layer is closed or is made invisible, the labels no longer display. If
the data or geographic information changes, the labels change. If you
create an expression for your labels and change the expression, the
current labels are dynamically replaced with new ones. See Figure 53
on page 127.
In addition to label content, you control the position, display, and look
of automatic labels by setting their properties. You can set conditions
for displaying labels, in the style in which will display, and in what
position for all the objects in the layer.
The Properties panel enables you to customize the display for each
layer in a Map window. In the Layer Control dialog box, you can select
a layer and click on the Labels button to bring up the Label Properties
dialog. There, you can change the default styles for the labels, set the
label position, and the visible range at which a label displays.
NOTE
Clicking a button in the Styles panel displays a dialog box permitting
you to define Style properties.
Figure 53
Label Properties Dialog Box
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 127
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Navigating the Area Map
Map Navigator
The Map Navigator allows to move around within the Area Map using
a selection window. See Figure 54 below.
Figure 54
Using the Map Navigator—Example
Layers that contain many points do not display when using the Map
Navigator (minor cities, road, highway, etc. layers). Once the Display
changes to the new view, layers are added.
To use the Map Navigator:
1.
Left-click on the Area Map to display Map Navigator options.
See Figure 55 below.
Figure 55
Map Navigator Options
128 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________ TWX300 Area Map
2.
Select the Map navigator... menu option. The Map Navigator
window displays over the map.
3.
Using the left mouse button, select an area from the Map
navigator window you want to view, by left-clicking and
holding down the mouse button.
4.
Drag the mouse to complete a rectangle around the area you wish
to move to (Figure 56 below). The new area displays as
illustrated in Figure 57 below.
Figure 56
5.
Using Map Navigator
Click the Windows Close button to remain at the new view and
to close the Map Navigator window.
Figure 57
Changing the View
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 129
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Previous View
- To return to the previous zoom view, right-click on the map and
select the Previous zoom menu item. The Display returns to the
previous view. Up to twenty previous views are maintained in
memory; the last previous view is always the Map Geoset at full
extent.
Full Screen Mode
- To display in full-screen mode, right-click on the map and select the
Toggle full screen menu item, or click CTRL+F. Figure 58 below
is an extreme example of Map Navigator zoomed-out to maximum.
Figure 58
Map Navigator—Zoomed Out Maximum
130 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________ TWX300 Area Map
Zooming and Panning
By using the functions described here, you can freely navigate the Area
Map.
NOTE
Anytime
,
, or
are displayed, right-clicking the mouse and
selecting Previous zoom steps you back to the previous zoom.
Zooming to the Extents (Data Limits) of the
Subscribed Data Region
- In the Thunderstorm Warning System toolbar, click
. The screen
redraws to the extents of the data in your subscribed area that
contains lightning data.
Zooming In On Displayed Data
Method One
1.
In the Thunderstorm Warning System toolbar, click
cursor changes to a magnifying glass.
. The
2.
Place the cursor in the center of the map area that you wish to
magnify.
3.
Left-click the mouse button. The screen redraws the new zoom
level.
4.
Continue clicking until you obtain the zoom level you want.
Method Two
1.
In the Thunderstorm Warning System toolbar, click
cursor changes to a magnifying glass.
. The
2.
Place the cursor to the left and above the area you wish to
magnify.
3.
Click and hold the left mouse button.
4.
Drag the cursor right and down to create a rectangle around the
area you wish to magnify.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 131
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
5.
NOTE
Release the mouse button.
When zooming to a specific area, the new area displayed is centered
around the spot where you clicked. In other words, the specific area
you clicked on becomes the new center of the Display. Use
position the map area as needed on the display.
to
Zooming Out on Displayed Data
NOTE
1.
In the toolbar, click
glass.
. The cursor changes to a magnifying
2.
Place the cursor in the center of the map area that you wish to
zoom out from.
3.
Click the left mouse button. The screen redraws the new zoom
level
4.
Continue clicking until you obtain the zoom level you want.
When zooming to a specific area, the new area displayed is centered
around the spot where you clicked. In other words, the specific area
you clicked on becomes the new center of the Display. Use
position the map area as needed on the Display.
to
Panning the Area Map
NOTE
1.
In the Thunderstorm Warning System toolbar, select
cursor changes to the Pan icon.
. The
2.
Place the cursor "hand" directly over the map area you wish to
move.
3.
Click and hold the left mouse button.
4.
Drag the cursor in any direction to place the center of the
selected area where you want it displayed.
5.
Release the mouse button. The Display redraws the new location.
Right-click the mouse to return to the previous zoom level.
132 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________ TWX300 Area Map
Projections and Geosets
Map Projections
Maps can be displayed in many different projections. A projection is a
method of reducing the distortion that occurs when objects from a
spherical surface are displayed on a flat surface (coordinate system).
There are many different types of projections, each designed to reduce
the amount of distortion for a given area. To go into greater detail on
maps, projections and geosets, is beyond the scope of this manual.
Many books and Internet sites are available to provide you with more
detailed information.
Displaying the Choose Projection Dialog Box
NOTE
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select Tools > Configuration.
The Enter Password dialog box displays.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The General Configuration dialog box
displays.
4.
Click the General tab.
5.
In the Map panel, click Select Projection. The Choose
Projection dialog box displays. See Figure 59 on page 134.
When displayed, current settings and definitions are viewable.
Changing the Default Map Projection
1.
From the Thunderstorm Warning System Main menu, select
Tools > Configuration. The Enter Password dialog box
displays.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The General Configuration dialog box
displays.
4.
Click the General tab.
5.
In the Map panel, click Select Projection. The Choose
Projection dialog box displays. See Figure 59 on page 134.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 133
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
6.
Select a category from the Category drop-down list box.
7.
Select a category member from the Category Members list.
8.
Click OK to accept the changes and return to the General
Configuration dialog box.
9.
Click Save & Exit to save the changes and return to the Display.
Click Save if you still have other changes to make in the General
Configuration dialog box.
For information on commonly used map projections, see Appendix B,
Commonly Used Map Projections on page 301.
Figure 59
Choose Projection Dialog Box
Map Geosets
A Geoset is a collection of map layers and their settings. Geosets are
data sets made up of standard MapInfo format map files (.tab) of the
same geographic region, hence the name Geoset. Geosets help you
avoid the time consuming task of opening and displaying layers
individually each time you want to work with them. The extension for
a geoset is .gst. A .gst is a text file that contains several metadata
keys that tell Thunderstorm Warning System what tables to display and
how to display them.
Geoset settings include:
- Projection
- Default zooms
- Auto-labeling of objects
134 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 4 _________________________________________________________ TWX300 Area Map
- Zoom layering, and
- Whether the table is visible when opened.
Changing the Default Map Geoset
1.
From the Thunderstorm Warning System menu, select Tools >
Configuration. The Password dialog box displays.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The General Configuration dialog box
displays.
4.
Click the General tab.
5.
In the Map panel, click Change Geoset. The Geoset dialog box
displays (Figure 60 below).
Figure 60
Geoset Dialog Box
6.
Select a new Geoset from the drop-down list.
7.
Click Close to accept the changes and close the dialog box.
For more information on map set management, refer to the ReadMe.txt
file on the Thunderstorm Warning System Installation CD.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 135
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
This page intentionally left blank.
136 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 5 ________________________________________________ Understanding Warning Areas
CHAPTER 5
UNDERSTANDING WARNING AREAS
A Warning Area is a user-defined region or area of concern. Figure 61
below illustrates six examples. The Warning Area displays over the
Area Map, and is made up of Vaisala and user-defined circles,
concentric circles (which can be utilized as range rings), and polygons.
TWX300 monitors lightning activity within that region. Any
aggregation of circles and polygons may compose a Warning Area. If
two Warning Areas touch one another, they may be combined to create
a single, or larger, Warning Area.
Figure 61
Example Warning Areas—Six WAs Displayed
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 137
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
The number of Warning Areas TWX300 can display at once is limited
by the complexity of the Warning Areas, how much RAM the PC has
on-board, along with PC processor type and speed. Warning areas can
be enabled and disabled as needed, and the fill style of a Warning Area
in Alert or Clear mode can be configured by the user.
Warning Areas are independent of one another. TWX300 checks each
Warning Area and determines if a discharge has occurred within the
area. If a lightning event has occurred, TWX300 logs the event and
launches the Alert Timer for the Warning Area. If two Warning Areas
overlap, a lightning event occurring in the overlapped area is
considered as an event in both areas. A single event in an enabled
Warning Area will activate an Alert (Figure 62 below). The Alert
condition clears only when there has been no lightning in the area for
the defined number of seconds.
Figure 62
Example Warning Areas—Close-Up of WA in Alert
The system performs a test of the intersection of all the incoming
discharges within all the Warning Areas. If an intersection is found
within a predefined Warning Area, the system will raise the Alert status
of that area. Once an Alert is issued in a Warning Area, the Warning
Area properties change in accordance with the properties currently
defined by the In Alert and Clear styles, and if defined, the PC may
emit an audible beep. An entry is made in the Alarm Log each time that
any Alert is issued, Cleared, or Acknowledged.
138 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 5 ________________________________________________ Understanding Warning Areas
Creating Warning Areas
A Warning Area is a user-defined region (area of concern) that when
enabled, displays over the TWX300 Area Map. The region is made up
of user-defined circles and polygons which can be combined with
another to define a greater Warning Area. You can also configure
concentric circles as range rings.
Using the Alarms dialog box, you can configure individual Warning
Area parameters including:
- Enable or disable IC data for Warning Areas
- Enable or disable defined Warning Areas
- Set the value used to assign the time the Warning Area is in Alert
after the last discharge was received
- Define duration until Clear from last event
- Defining the Warning Area style used for In Alert mode
- Defining the Warning Area style used for Clear mode
- Make a Warning Area visible on the Display
- Enable or disable an audible beep for a Warning Area for the
following:
- Alert
- Clear
To create a Warning Area:
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select Tools > Modify Warning
Areas. The Password dialog box displays
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The Area Definition dialog box displays.
See Figure 63 on page 140 for detail.
4.
Before proceeding, decide on the type and shape of the Warning
Area you want to create, or action you wish to perform from the
following:
- Create a circular Warning Area with Known Coordinates.
- Create a circular Warning Area with Unknown Coordinates.
- Create a Concentric Warning Area.
- Create a Polygon-shaped Warning Area.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 139
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
- Combine Warning Areas.
- Configuring Email notification for a selected Warning Area.
Figure 63
Area Definition Dialog Box
140 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 5 ________________________________________________ Understanding Warning Areas
Circular Warning Area with Known
Coordinates
Refer to Figure 64 on page 143.
1.
With the Area Definition dialog box displayed, enter the latitude
and longitude coordinates in the appropriate Lat: and Lon: text
boxes for the center of the circular Warning Area.
Use the toggle button next to the direction indicator
to switch between N and S, and E and W cardinal points when
entering coordinates.
2.
In the Radius text box, enter a value that defines the outer limits
of the circle, as measured from center. The unit of measurement
is dependant upon the selection made in the Map panel, General
Configuration dialog box.
3.
Click
, under the Radius text box, to add a circle. The
Area dialog box displays.
4.
Enter a new name in the Enter the area name text box.
5.
Click OK to proceed. The Area dialog box closes.
6.
The name displays in the Area Definition list box, select the new
Warning Area name from the list.
7.
In the Properties panel, set the following properties as needed:
Enabled—Enables the selected Warning Area for Alert
conditions.
Visible—Enables the selected Warning Area to be displayed
over the TWX300 Area Map.
Beep—Enables the PC to sound a beep when the enabled
Warning Area goes into Alert mode.
CG—When the Cloud to ground option is selected, the
Warning Area goes into Alert mode when a CG event occurs
within the selected Warning Area
IC—When the Intra cloud option is selected, the Warning Area
goes into Alert mode when an IC event occurs within the
selected Warning Area.
8.
Click Save.
9.
Create another circle, if needed, repeating Steps 1 through 8.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 141
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
10.
Click Save & Exit to save the file and return to the Display.
NOTE
The Area Definition dialog box text and text boxes used to enter Lat.
and Lon., will display differently depending on whether the Coordinate in DMS option is selected in the General Configuration > Others tab.
NOTE
To set custom sounds and Alert Duration Time, select the Tools >
Configuration menu item; and click
.
NOTE
The radius parameter specifies the circle radius in the distance unit
TWX300 is currently using. Miles is the default distance unit.
NOTE
The circle uses current Warning Area style definitions.
142 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 5 ________________________________________________ Understanding Warning Areas
In Figure 64 below, a circular Warning Area with Las Vegas, Nevada
as the center of the radius is displayed.
Figure 64
Creating a Circular Warning Area—Known
Coordinates
Circular Warning Area with
Unknown Coordinates
See Figure 65 on page 145 for detail.
1.
Place the TWX300 cursor on the map area target where you want
the center of the circular Warning Area to be placed. Try to place
the cursor as close to the center of the area as possible (city,
town, highway, etc.). It may be helpful to zoom in on the target
first in order to get a more accurate reading of the Latitude and
Longitude (cursor position).
2.
Observe and note the Lat: and Lon: values in the TWX300
Status bar.
3.
Display the Area Definition dialog box.
4.
In the Lat: and Lon: text boxes, enter the latitude and longitude
coordinates obtained from Step 2, for the center of the circular
Warning Area. Use the toggle button next to the direction
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 143
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
indicator
to switch between N and S, and E and W
cardinal points when entering coordinates.
NOTE
The Area Definition dialog box text and text boxes used to enter Lat.
and Lon., will display differently depending on whether the Coordinate in DMS option is selected in the General Configuration > Others tab.
5.
In the Radius text box, enter a value that defines the outer limits
of the circle, as measured from center. The unit of measurement
is dependant upon the selection made in the Map panel, General
Configuration dialog box.
6.
Click
to add a circle directly on the map. The Area
dialog box displays.
7.
Enter a new name in the Enter the area name text box.
8.
Click OK to proceed. The Area dialog box closes.
9.
The name displays in the Area Definition list box. Select the
new Warning Area name from the list.
10.
In the Properties panel, set the following properties as needed:
Enabled—Enables the selected Warning Area for Alert
conditions.
Visible—Enables the selected Warning Area to be displayed
over the TWX300 Area Map.
Beep—Enables the PC to sound a beep when the enabled
Warning Area goes into Alert mode.
CG—When the Cloud to ground option is selected, the
Warning Area goes into Alert mode when a CG event occurs
within the selected Warning Area
IC—When the Intra cloud option is selected, the Warning Area
goes into Alert mode when an IC event occurs within the
selected Warning Area.
11.
Click Save.
12.
Create another Warning Area if needed, repeating Steps 1
through 11.
13.
Click Save & Exit to save the file and return to the Display.
144 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 5 ________________________________________________ Understanding Warning Areas
In Figure 65 below, a circular Warning Area with Tucson, Arizona, as
the center of the radius is displayed.
Figure 65
NOTE
Creating a Circular Warning Area—Unknown
Coordinates
To set custom sounds and Alert Duration Time, select the Tools >
Configuration menu item; and click
.
NOTE
The radius parameter specifies the circle radius, in the distance unit
TWX300 is currently using. Miles is the default distance unit.
NOTE
The circle uses current Warning Area style definitions.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 145
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Circular Warning Area–Manually
Placed
Use this method when the coordinates are unknown, or to manually
place a circle anywhere on the Area Map. See Figure 66 on page 147
for detail.
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select Tools > Modify Warning
Areas. The Password dialog box displays
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK. The Area Definition dialog box displays.
4.
Click the Add Circle, Draw On Map button
cursor enters Draw Circle Directly On Map mode
5.
Place the Draw Circle cursor in the map area where you want
the center of the circular Warning Area to be placed. Try to place
the cursor as close to the center of the area as possible (city,
town, highway, etc.).
6.
Left-click and hold the mouse button.
7.
Hold the mouse button and drag the mouse until you have the
size of the circle you want, then release the mouse button. The
Area dialog box displays.
8.
Enter a new name in the Enter the area name text box.
9.
Click OK to proceed. The Area dialog box closes.
10.
The name displays in the Area Definition list box. Select the
new Warning Area name from the list.
11.
In the Properties panel, set the following properties as needed:
. The
Enabled—Enables the selected Warning Area for Alert
conditions.
Visible—Enables the selected Warning Area to be displayed
over the TWX300 Area Map.
Beep—Enables the PC to sound a beep when the enabled
Warning Area goes into Alert mode.
CG—When the Cloud to ground option is selected, the
Warning Area goes into Alert mode when a CG event occurs
within the selected Warning Area
146 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 5 ________________________________________________ Understanding Warning Areas
IC—When the Intra cloud option is selected, the Warning Area
goes into Alert mode when an IC event occurs within the
selected Warning Area.
12.
Click Save.
13.
Create another Warning Area if needed, repeating Steps 1
through 12.
14.
Click Save & Exit to save the file and return to the Display.
Figure 66
NOTE
Manually-Placed Circular Warning Area
To set custom sounds and Alert Duration Time, select the Tools >
Configuration menu item; and click
NOTE
.
The radius parameter specifies the circle radius, in the distance unit
TWX300 is currently using. Miles is the default distance unit.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 147
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
NOTE
The circle uses current Warning Area style definitions.
Concentric Warning Area
To aid in providing a maximum notification time, you may want to
create several concentric range rings. A minimum of three concentric
rings is recommended. See Figure 67 on page 150 for detail.
1.
With the Area Definition dialog box displayed, enter the known
latitude and longitude coordinates in the Lat: and Lon: text
boxes for the center of the innermost circular Warning Area. Use
the toggle button next to the direction indicator
to
switch between N and S, and E and W cardinal points when
entering coordinates.
NOTE
The Area Definition dialog box text and text boxes used to enter Lat.
and Lon., will display differently depending on whether the Coordinate in DMS option is selected in the General Configuration > Others tab.
If the coordinates are unknown, begin with the procedure
Circular Warning Area with Unknown Coordinates on page 143
for the first step.
2.
In the Radius text box, enter a small value (5 to 15) that defines
the outer limits of the circle, measured from center. The unit of
measurement is dependant upon the selection made in the Map
panel, General Configuration dialog box.
3.
Click
4.
Enter a unique name in the Enter the area name box.
5.
Click OK to proceed. The Area dialog box closes.
6.
In the Radius text box, enter a medium value (20 to 50) that
defines the outer limits of the circle, as measured from center.
7.
Click
8.
Enter another unique name in the Enter the area name text box.
to add a circle. The Area dialog box displays.
to add a circle. The Area dialog box displays
148 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 5 ________________________________________________ Understanding Warning Areas
9.
Click OK to proceed.
10.
In the Radius text box, enter a maximum value (50 to 200
depending upon the area you are subscribed to) that defines the
outer limits of the circle, as measured from center.
11.
Click
12.
Enter another unique name in the Enter the area name text box.
13.
Repeat Steps 1 through 6, increasing or decreasing the outer
limits of the circle, until you have all the concentric circles that
are needed.
14.
For each of the newly created areas, select each new Warning
Area name from the list and set the following properties for each
in the Properties panel:
to add a circle. The Area dialog box displays.
Enabled—Enables the Warning Area for Alarm conditions.
Visible—Displays the Warning Area over the TWX300 Area
Map.
Beep—Enables the PC to sound a beep when the enabled
Warning Area goes into Alert mode.
CG—When the Cloud to ground option is selected, the
Warning Area goes into Alert mode when a CG event occurs
within the selected Warning Area
IC—When the Intra cloud option is selected, the Warning Area
goes into Alert mode when an IC event occurs within the
selected Warning Area.
15.
When done, click Save & Exit to save the configuration and
return to the display.
NOTE
The Warning Area circles use current Warning Area style definitions.
NOTE
The unit of measurement is dependant upon the selection made in the
Map panel, General Configuration dialog box.
NOTE
The values given in the steps above are for example only. You may
determine the size of your circles (from center) as needed.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 149
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
NOTE
To set custom sounds and Alert Duration Time, select the Tools >
Configuration menu item; and click
NOTE
.
The radius parameter specifies the circle radius, in the distance unit
TWX300 is currently using. Miles is the default distance unit.
Figure 67
Concentric Warning Areas—Outside Ring is In
Alert
150 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 5 ________________________________________________ Understanding Warning Areas
Warning Area Using a Polygon
See Figure 68 on page 152 for detail.
1.
With the Area Definition dialog box displayed, click
to
add a polygon. The cursor changes to the Create Polygon tool.
2.
Using the Polygon tool, place the cursor where you want the first
point of the polygon to be assigned.
3.
Left-click to place the first point of the Warning Area, and
release the mouse button.
4.
Drag the cursor to the next location, and left-click the mouse
button.
5.
Repeat Steps 1 through 4 until you have the shape you want.
6.
When you reach the end of the area, double-click the mouse
button to close the polygon. The Area dialog box displays.
7.
In the Enter the area name box, enter the name for the new
Warning Area.
8.
Click OK to proceed.
9.
The name displays in the Area Definition list box, select the new
Warning Area name from the list.
10.
In the Properties panel, set the following properties as needed
for each new Warning Area:
Enabled—Enables the selected Warning Area for Alarm
conditions.
Visible—Enables the selected Warning Area to be displayed
over the TWX300 Area Map.
Beep—Enables the PC to sound a beep when the enabled
Warning Area goes into Alert mode.
CG—When the Cloud to ground option is selected, the
Warning Area goes into Alert mode when a CG event occurs
within the selected Warning Area
IC—When the Intra cloud option is selected, the Warning Area
goes into Alert mode when an IC event occurs within the
selected Warning Area.
11.
Click Save.
12.
Repeat Steps 1 through 11 to create another Warning Area if
needed.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 151
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
13.
Click Save & Exit to save the file and return to the Display.
NOTE
Double-clicking the left mouse button closes the polygon (can be done
at any time).
NOTE
To set custom sounds and Alert Duration Time, select the Tools >
Configuration menu item; and click
NOTE
.
The Warning Area polygon uses the current Warning Area style
definitions.
Figure 68
Two Polygon-Shaped Warning Areas—One is In
Alert
152 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 5 ________________________________________________ Understanding Warning Areas
Defining Warning Area Styles
Styles (Warning Area display appearance) are used by TWX300 to
indicate when a Warning Area has entered Alert mode, and when the
area is in Clear mode. The default is red for In Alert mode, and green is
used to indicate a Clear mode. Each can be configured by the user to
suit a particular situation or viewing need. Three different Warning
Area styles are possible, and are discussed in Defining a Warning Area
Style below.
Displaying the Region Style Dialog
Box
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select Tools > Configuration.
The Password dialog box displays.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The General Configuration dialog box
displays.
4.
Click the General tab.
5.
Click
to configure the Clear
Warning Area style. The Region Style dialog box displays.
Click
to configure the In
Alert Warning Area style. The Region Style dialog box displays.
6.
Proceed with the appropriate configuration steps on this page for
Clear and In Alert styles.
A table describing default Region Style colors is located at Table 27 on
page 154.
Defining a Warning Area Style
1.
With the Region Style dialog box displayed (see procedure
above) set the style for each of the buttons described above:
Clear and In Alert.
2.
From the Fill panel:
Select a Pattern for the Warning Area.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 153
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Select a Foreground color.
To select a Background color, enable the Background check
box in the Fill panel.
3.
From the Border panel:
Select a Color for the Warning Area border line in Clear mode.
Select a Foreground color.
4.
From the Width sub panel:
Select the line Width in either pixels, or points.
5.
Click OK to accept the changes and close the dialog box.
Figure 69
NOTE
Region Style Dialog Box—In Alert and Clear
Modes
A preview of your selections is displayed in the Sample panel.
Table 27
Warning Area
Clear
In Alert
Default Region Style Colors
Default Color
Green
Red
154 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 5 ________________________________________________ Understanding Warning Areas
Enabling and Displaying a Warning Area
1.
With the Area Definition dialog box displayed, select the
Warning Area you want to enable for display from the list box.
2.
In the Properties panel:
Ensure the Enabled check box is selected to enable the Warning
Area.
Select the Visible check box to display the Warning Area over
the Area Map.
3.
Click Save & Exit to complete the operation and return to the
Display.
Figure 70
Enabling a Selected Warning Area
See Table 28 on page 156 for detailed description of the Area
Definition dialog box.
Displaying Multiple Warning Areas
- Repeat the above procedure for each Warning Area you wish to
display over the Area Map.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 155
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Modifying a Warning Area
Refer to Table 28 below for button and option definitions.
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select Tools > Modify Warning
Areas. The Password dialog box displays
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The Area Definition dialog box displays.
4.
From the Area Definition list box, select the Warning Area you
want to modify.
5.
Using the buttons (functions) provided in the Area Definition
dialog box, modify the selected Warning Area.
6.
When done click Save to save the current configuration.
Click Save & Exit to save the changes, and close the dialog box.
Table 28
Area Definition Dialog Box—Functions
Button
Purpose
Remarks
Buttons used to create a new Warning Area(s)
Click to Add a Circle over Adds a circle relative to the information in the
the Area Map.
Lat:, Lon:, and Radius fields displayed above
the button.
Click to Add a Polygon
Adds a polygon relative to the current mouse
directly over the Area Map. position. Left-click the mouse at each location
point until the shape you want is attained, then
double-click the mouse button to close the
polygon.
Click to Add a Circle
Adds a circle relative to the current mouse
directly over the Area Map. position. This button is located to the right of the
Polygon button. Press and hold left mouse
button, drag the mouse until the circle is the
correct size.
Click to Combine selected Combines selected Warning Areas.
Warning Areas.
Buttons used to modify existing Warning Areas
Click to Select a
configured Warning Area
node for editing.
Click to Move or Stretch a
Warning Area.
Click to Add a node to a
configured Warning Area.
156 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 5 ________________________________________________ Understanding Warning Areas
Table 28
Button
Area Definition Dialog Box—Functions (Continued)
Purpose
Click to Delete selected
node in a configured
Warning Area.
Click to Apply changes
made to a selected
Warning Area.
Click to Cancel changes
made to a selected
Warning Area.
Clicking Saves selected
Warning Area to a file.
Remarks
Clicking displays the Area dialog box. Enter a
new name for the new configuration and click OK
to save.
Clicking displays the Save As dialog box
permitting you to Save a configured Warning
Area in ASCII format.
Clicking Loads a saved
Clicking displays the Open dialog box permitting
Warning Area file.
you to Load a saved Warning Area. You can
create your own files by entering a set of points in
ASCII for Latitude and Longitude, then loading
the file.
Buttons used to configure a task or function for a selected Warning Area
Enabled–Enables (makes active) selected
Select the appropriate
Warning Area.
check box(es) to define
properties for the selected Visible–Makes selected Warning Area visible
over the Area Map.
Warning Area.
Beep–Enable audible cue for Warning Area. PC
speaker beep; not to be confused with In Alert, or
Clear sounds.
Click to Rename a
selected Warning Area.
Click to Remove a
selected Warning Area.
Standard interface buttons
Click to Save changes.
The dialog box remains
open after saving
permitting you to make
more changes.
Click to Save changes and
close and Exit the dialog
box.
Click to Close the dialog
box without saving
changes.
Click to display the online
Help file.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 157
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Combining Warning Areas
When combining Warning Areas, the two Warning Areas that are to be
combined, must be touching one another before combining them. You
cannot combine Warning Areas that do not overlap.
This procedure assumes that you already have created Warning Areas.
To combine Warning Areas:
NOTE
1.
With the Area Definition dialog box displayed, select the first
Warning Area you want to combine with another area from the
list box.
2.
While pressing and holding down the CTRL key, select another
Warning Area from the same list.
3.
Repeat Step 2, as needed, to select all the Warning Areas you
want to combine.
4.
When done selecting, click
Area dialog box displays.
5.
In the Enter the area name box, enter a unique name for the
combined regions.
6.
Click OK.
7.
The combined regions display with the new configuration on the
Display, and with the new name is displayed in the Area
Definition list box.
8.
Select the new Warning Area from the list box.
9.
In the Properties panel, set the properties as needed.
10.
Click Save & Exit to save the file and return to the Display.
to combine regions. The
Once you have combined areas, the old area names may be deleted,
while the combined area remains.
158 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 5 ________________________________________________ Understanding Warning Areas
Figure 71
Combining Warning Areas
The example presented in Figure 71 above: the circular Warning Area
Airport_Tampa_Fla [WA5], was combined with the polygonal
Warning Area airport corridor [WA17], to create a new Warning Area
named Tampa Airport corridor [WA18]; while the remaining portions
of the Warning Areas remain unaffected.
Removing a Warning Area
1.
With the Area Definition dialog box displayed, select the
Warning Area you want to remove from the list box.
2.
Click
the request.
3.
Click Yes. The Warning Area is removed from the list.
. A message displays prompting you to confirm
Click No to cancel the operation and return to the Display.
4.
Click Save & Exit to complete the operation and return to the
Display.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 159
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Renaming a Warning Area
1.
With the Area Definition dialog box displayed, select the
Warning Area you want to rename from the list box.
2.
Click
3.
Enter the new name in the Enter the area name box.
4.
Click OK. The renamed Warning Area is displayed in the list
box.
5.
Click Save & Exit to save the changes and return to the Display.
. The Area dialog box displays.
Determining Warning Area Properties
1.
With the Area Definition dialog box displayed, select a Warning
Area.
If the Warning Area is enabled, the area will highlight on the
Area Map. Refer to Figure 72 on page 161 for details.
2.
Observe the Properties panel for information about the selected
Warning Area.
If the Warning Area is a circle, the center Latitude, Longitude,
and Radius of the circle are displayed.
3.
Click Close to complete the operation and to return to the
Display.
NOTE
The Area Definition dialog box text and text boxes used to enter Lat.
and Lon., will display differently depending on whether the
Coordinate in DMS option is selected in the General Configuration
> Others tab.
NOTE
Additional Warning Area properties may be viewed in the Alarms
dialog box.
160 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 5 ________________________________________________ Understanding Warning Areas
Figure 72
Determining Warning Area Properties
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 161
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
This page intentionally left blank.
162 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 6 __________________________________________________Using Electric Field Mill Data
CHAPTER 6
USING ELECTRIC FIELD MILL DATA
Alerts and Alarms
For information on using EFM data to create an Alarm, refer to
Chapter 7, Using RADS and Relays, on page 171.
For information on using EFM data to create an Alert, refer to Chapter
8, Understanding Alert Status, on page 183.
For details on setting up an EFM communication connection, refer to
EFM Connection on page 283.
EFM Status Window
A status window for each EFM configured in the TWX300 system is
accessible that displays the following data source information:
- EFM name (full name set during TWX300 installation)
- EFM status
- EFM High or Median value, depending on the EFM Filtering mode
selected in the General Configuration dialog box.
- EFM Commands access button
- EFM Graph access button
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 163
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Displaying the EFM Status Window
- From the TWX300 Main menu, select View > EFM > EFMx
(where x is a specific EFM number). The EFM Status window
displays. See Figure 73 below.
Figure 73
EFM Status Window
Alert State
Once in an Alert state, reports remain red until the Alert state is over.
This means that you may see data that is below the threshold in the
color red. See Figure 74 below.
Figure 74
EFM Status Window—Alert State
Reports are received at a rate of one to ten per second. Reports display
at a rate of one per second.
The values are in volts per meter (V/m). Values display as signed
integers with a maximum of four digits with no leading zeroes.
If error conditions exist, or no data is received from an EFM, a
message displays in the EFM window title bar.
And, depending upon the configuration:
- The displayed value is the highest absolute value recorded for the
past full second.
Or:
- The displayed value is the median filter of all values recorded for
the past full second.
164 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 6 __________________________________________________Using Electric Field Mill Data
EFM Graph Window
The EFM Graph window shows electric field measurements. On a
clear day, electric field measurements normally range from 0 to +200
volts per meter (V/m). In areas near thunderstorm activity, the electric
field intensity increases as the potential for lightning and lightning
hazard increases. See Figure 75 below.
Figure 75
EFM Graph Window
Because higher electrical charges are present in clouds during a
thunderstorm, the electric field intensity is much higher during stormy
weather. Once a thunderstorm has formed overhead, the electric field
will typically reverse polarity and steadily increase. By the time the
electric field reaches a value outside of ±500 V/m to ±2000 V/m, the
potential of lightning discharge becomes significant. The electric field
is dependent on such factors as geographic location and the time of the
year. Refer to your EFM User’s Guide for more details.
The EFM Graph function displays a line graph (plot) for each EFM in
the TWX300 system, and displays the following information for each:
- Short name for the EFM
- An X-axis displaying the time line in minutes, oldest to newest (left
to right)
- A Y-axis displaying the measured positive and negative volts per
meter (V/m)
- Thresholds are indicated by a line (lines) extending across the width
of the window
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 165
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Features
- The graph window is scalable
- You can zoom in and out of the graph for better viewing of data
- Making the graph larger will yield more detail
- Zero line adjusts automatically (adjusting scale indicates positive
(+) and negative (-) field values in volts per meter)
- Graph function is available in Replay mode
- Length of the graph is equal to six times the selected Time Period
length displayed in the Map Legend
Displaying the EFM Graph Window
- With the EFM Status window displayed, click Graph.
Navigating the EFM Graph Window
To Zoom In
1.
Place the cursor to the left and above the area you want to
magnify.
2.
Click and hold the left mouse button.
3.
Drag the cursor down and to the right to magnify the area.
4.
Release the mouse button. The new area displays.
5.
Click the Windows Close button to complete the operation and
return to the Display.
Figure 76
EFM Graph—Normal View
Refer to Figure 76 above and Figure 77 below for detail.
166 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 6 __________________________________________________Using Electric Field Mill Data
Figure 77
EFM Graph—Zoomed In
To Zoom Out
1.
Place the cursor in the lower right portion of the graph window.
2.
Click and hold the left mouse button.
3.
Drag the cursor up and to the left to zoom out of the area.
4.
Release the mouse button. The new area displays.
5.
Click the Windows Close button to complete the operation and
return to the Display.
To Pan
1.
Place the cursor on the map.
2.
Click and hold the right mouse button.
3.
Drag the cursor to pan.
4.
Release the mouse button. The new area displays.
5.
Click the Windows Close button to complete the operation and
return to the Display.
EFM Commands
Displaying the EFM Command and
Control Dialog Box
1.
From the TWX300 menu, select View > EFM > EFMx (where x
is a specific EFM number). The EFM Status dialog box displays.
See Figure 78 on page 168.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 167
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
2.
Click Commands. The EFM Commands dialog box displays for
the selected EFM.
You can now view current values used by clicking a button in the
Get Values panel.
You can now reset to the default settings, or
Set an Enhancement Factor for the selected EFM.
3.
Click the Windows Close button to complete the operation and
return to the Display.
- With the exception of the EF (enhancement factor) command,
all other commands are used to retrieve information from the
EFM.
- The EF command is used to send values to the EFM.
- Hourly, the system sends a NORM and an EF command to
the connected EFMs. The EF value is recorded in the
configuration file.
Figure 78
EFM Commands Dialog Box
NOTE
Messages returned by a selected EFM can be viewed in the Returned
Message text box. Refer to your EFM User's Guide for details.
NOTE
Refer to your EFM User’s Guide for information on setting and
getting EFM values, command definitions, and details on determining
an enhancement factor.
168 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 6 __________________________________________________Using Electric Field Mill Data
Sending EFM Commands
For EFM sources that accept external commands, TWX300 provides a
command interface. The selected command is sent to the EFM and all
data received are displayed in a Returned Message box where you can
observe the results of the command. Any data received from the EFM
while in this mode is processed normally as part of the regular data
stream. The commands displayed are unique to the EFM used. Refer to
specific EFM documentation for details on command usage and
descriptions of data formats.
1.
From the TWX300 menu, select View > EFM > EFMx (where x
is the specific EFM number). The EFM Connection dialog box
displays.
2.
Click the Commands button. The EFMx dialog box displays.
3.
Make the needed changes in the Get Values or Set Values panel.
4.
Any messages from the selected EFM are displayed in the
Returned Message text box.
5.
Click the Windows Close button to close the dialog box, and
return to the Display.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 169
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
This page intentionally left blank.
170 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 7 _____________________________________________________ Using RADS and Relays
CHAPTER 7
USING RADS AND RELAYS
Working With RADS
TWX300 checks the conditions in the RAD equations, if a change is
detected, then the RADS changes (a different message is sent to
change the colors that are displayed by RADS).
The display status of the lights on the RADS is configured by creating
and applying logical expressions. These logical expressions are created
using the Create Alarm Equation for dialog box and are based on:
- CG or Cloud lightning within Warning Areas
- Electric field conditions exceeding a specified threshold. You define
a single threshold that is applied for both positive and negative
polarity.
- Any combination of the first two conditions
RADS will inform you, if good data is not being received from
Central, or that there are less than the required number of EFMs are
sending good data. RADS does this by blinking the last received color.
- If good data from Central has stopped, messages are not sent to
RADS after the CountDown time has elapsed.
- If less than the required number of EFMs are reporting good data,
messages will not be sent to RADS.
- If no messages at the RADS arrive in the next 30-seconds, RADS
flashes with the last color combination it received; and no new
message is sent the RADS until a good connection is established
with Central, and the required number of EFMs are operational.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 171
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
- TWX300 uses the value entered in the Additional seconds beyond
default with no Central or EFM data text box (Alarms dialog box),
to determine when to stop sending messages to the RADS.
NOTE
RADS lights and audible alarm parameters are maintained in the
Configuration file. Alarm conditions are checked and the configured
color and/or audible message are sent out via the appropriate socket.
For information on setting up the RADS connection, refer to RADS
Connection on page 284.
RADS Status
RADS status is displayed in the RADS/Relays Status window. RADS
status displays on the top 2/3 of the window; while Relays status
displays at the bottom 1/3 of the window.
Figure 79
Determining RADS Status—Examples
Displaying the RADS and Relays Status Window
- From the TWX300 Main menu, select View > RADS/Relays
status. The window displays.
Closing the RADS and Relays Status Window
- Repeat the process described above.
Or:
- Right-click the status window and select Close.
172 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 7 _____________________________________________________ Using RADS and Relays
Alarm Equation for RADS
- Lightning within one or more defined Warning Areas
- Electric field mills to monitor
- Electric field threshold values
1.
From the TWX300 menu, select Tools > Configuration. The
Enter Password dialog box displays.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The General Configuration dialog box
displays.
4.
Click the General tab.
5.
In the Alarm panel, click Show Alarm Configuration. The
Alarms dialog box displays. See Figure 80 below.
Figure 80
6.
Alarms Dialog Box
Click the RADS Equations tab. The RADS equations tab
displays. See Figure 81 below.
Current configuration settings are determined by observing tab
parameters when first displaying the tab.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 173
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Figure 81
7.
RADS Equations Tab
Select the Alarm condition you want to define from the
following button selection:
Selecting displays the Create Equation dialog box for
RADS Red.
Selecting displays the Create Equation dialog box for
RADS Red-Yellow.
Selecting displays the Create Equation dialog box for
RADS Yellow.
Selecting displays the Create Equation dialog box for
RADS Yellow-Green.
If none are selected the None of the above indicator displays.
8.
The Create equation... dialog box displays. Configure the
Alarm Equation as needed, and return to the RADS equations...
tab. See Creating the RADS Equation.
9.
In the Conditions to flash RADS panel
- Enter a value from 0 to the maximum number of configured
EFMs. This value represents the Number of EFMs that are
not sending good data that must be reached, before RADS
flashes.
174 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 7 _____________________________________________________ Using RADS and Relays
- In the Conditions to flash RADS panel, enter a value from 1
to 3600 in the Additional seconds beyond default with no
Central or EFM data box.
10.
If you want to emit an audible tone, select the Buzzer option
under the selected Alarm mode.
11.
Click Save & Exit to save the changes and exit the dialog box.
Click Save to save the changes, and leave the dialog box
displayed.
Creating the RADS Equation
The Create equation dialog box displays after selecting one of the
buttons in the RADS equations tab. By selecting a Warning Area, an
EFM or a combination of, you can create conditions which will cause a
RADS Alarm.
These conditions are defined in logical expressions which the system
uses in determining Alarm conditions. For more information on
creating logical expressions, testing equations and detail on the Create
equation dialog box, refer to Appendix D, Creating and Testing
Logical Expressions, on page 317.
Figure 82
Create Equation for RADS
Figure 83
RADS Equation—Example
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 175
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Working With Relays
The system is capable of operating up to eight relays. Each of these
relays must be configured to have a Startup state (Active or Inactive)
and a Triggered state (Active or Inactive). During the startup process,
the relays are set to their configured initial startup state. In real-time,
the Alarm and Clear conditions are interrogated periodically and the
relays are controlled accordingly.
For information on setting up the Relays connection, refer to Relays
Connection on page 285.
Relays Status
Relay status is displayed in the RADS/Relays Status window. Relays
status displays on the bottom 1/3 of the window; while RADS status
displays at the top 2/3 of the window.
Figure 84
Determining RADS Status—Examples
Displaying the RADS and Relays Status Window
- From the TWX300 Main menu, select View > RADS/Relays
status. The window displays.
Closing the RADS and Relays Status Window
- Repeat the process described above.
Or:
- Right-click the status window and select Close.
Alarm Equations for Relays
1.
From the TWX300 menu, select Tools > Configuration. The
Enter Password dialog box displays.
2.
Enter your password.
176 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 7 _____________________________________________________ Using RADS and Relays
3.
Click OK to proceed. The General Configuration dialog box
displays.
4.
Click the General tab.
5.
In the Alarm panel, click Show Alarm Configuration. The
Alarms dialog box displays. See Figure 80 on page 173.
6.
Click the Relays equations tab. The Relay equations tab
displays. See Figure 85 below.
Figure 85
Relay Equations Tab
Current configuration settings are determined by observing tab
parameters when first displaying the tab.
7.
Select the Relay x button you want to define a condition for.
The Create equation... dialog box displays. Configure the
Alarm Equation as needed, and return to the Relays equations
tab. See Creating the Relay Equation.
8.
Configure the Alarm Equation as needed, and return to the
Relays Equations tab. See Creating the Relay Equation.
9.
Click Save & Exit to save the changes and exit the dialog box.
Click Save to save the changes, and leave the dialog box
displayed.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 177
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Creating the Relay Equation
The Create equation dialog box displays after selecting one of the
Relay buttons in the Relay equations tab. By selecting a Warning
Area, an EFM or a combination of, you can create conditions which
will trigger a relay. See Figure 86 and Figure 87 below
These conditions are defined in logical expressions which the system
uses in determining Alarm conditions. For more information on
creating logical expressions, testing equations and detail on the Create
equation dialog box, refer to Appendix D, Creating and Testing
Logical Expressions, on page 317.
Figure 86
Create Equation for Relays
Figure 87
Relay Equation—Example
178 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 7 _____________________________________________________ Using RADS and Relays
Determining Current Start Up and Trigger States
NOTE
This procedure assumes that you have already configured your Relays.
1.
With the Alarms dialog box displayed, click the Relay Options
tab.
Observe the indication in either the Start-Up State or Trigger
State column for each configured relay listed to the left (Relay #
column). The option will have a dot under the Active or Inactive
column indicating the state.
2.
Click the Windows Close button to complete the operation and
return to the Display.
Figure 88
Determining Relay Status
NOTE
An Active or Inactive State is determined by the black dot in the
column.
NOTE
Current configuration settings are determined by observing tab
parameters.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 179
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Configuring a Relay State
1.
With the Alarms dialog box displayed, click the Relay Options
tab.
Figure 89
NOTE
Relay Options Tab
Current configuration settings are determined by observing tab
parameters.
2.
From the Relay # column, select a Relay.
3.
Define the Startup state.
If you want the relay to be active at start-up, select the Startup
State Active option.
If you want the relay to be inactive at start-up, select the Startup
State Inactive option.
4.
Define the Trigger state.
If you want the trigger state of the relay to be active at start-up,
select the Trigger State Active option.
If you want the trigger state of the relay to be inactive at start-up,
select the Trigger State Inactive option.
5.
Define the hours that the relay is enabled (option).
Refer to Time Range Options on page 181 below.
6.
Click Save & Exit to save the changes and exit the dialog box.
180 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 7 _____________________________________________________ Using RADS and Relays
Time Range Options
When the Time ranges enabled option is enabled for a Relay,
selections allow the relay to trigger only if the trigger falls within the
defined time-range. When out of the selected time range, the relay will
be set to the start up value.
Figure 90
Defining Relay Time Ranges
In Figure 90 above:
- Relay 1 can only be triggered between 9:00 am and 4:00 pm in local
time (PC time zone setting).
- Relay 2 can only be triggered between 6:00 pm and 6:00 am the
next day (PC time zone setting).
- Relay 3 can only be triggered between 4:00 pm and 11:00 pm in
UTC time.
To define a time range:
1.
With the Alarms dialog box displayed, select the Relay options
tab.
2.
After selecting a Relay, select the Time ranges enabled option.
3.
From the Time ranges panel, select a beginning time from the
between spin box.
4.
From the Time ranges panel, select an ending time from the and
spin box.
5.
From the Time ranges panel, select the use UTC time option to
force the system to use UTC rather than PC local time.
6.
Click Save & Exit to save the changes and exit the dialog box.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 181
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
This page intentionally left blank.
182 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 8 ___________________________________________________ Understanding Alert Status
CHAPTER 8
UNDERSTANDING ALERT STATUS
Whenever a condition is met, as defined in the Alarms dialog box for
raising the Alert status, the Warning Area goes into an Alert condition.
The Alert along with the parameters that raised the Alert status are
logged. If a Warning Area is enabled, the Warning Area takes on the
style as defined by the "In Alert" style, and can be configured to
produce an audible cue. Note the area "In Alert" in the bottom right of
Figure 91 below.
Figure 91
Events Trigger an Alert
The Alerts Status window lists all enabled Warning Areas. When in
Alert, a red line stretches across the line item. See Figure 92 below.
Figure 92
Alert Status Window
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 183
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Managing Alerts
Displaying the Alerts Status
Window
1.
From the TWX300 menu, select View > Alerts Status. The
Alerts Status dialog box displays. See Figure 92 below.
Figure 93
2.
NOTE
Alerts Status Dialog Box
Click the Windows Close button to close the dialog box, and
return to the Display.
Check boxes in a column indicate the option has been enabled.
Table 29 below lists Alerts Status fields (columns) and their associated
purpose.
Table 29
Field
Alert
Name
Visible
Beep
Sound
Countdown
Alerts Status—Data Field Columns
Purpose
Warning Area
The Warning Area name as specified in the Configuration file
When checked, the Warning Area is visible on the Display
When checked, the PC beeps when the Warning Area is in Alert condition.
When checked, a sound is played when the Warning Area is in Alert or Clear
condition. You can select from one three default sounds. You may also use the
Windows Browse button to locate and play sound files you have recorded. It is
recommended that you place all sound files in (Windows 7 may have a different
path):
C:\Program Files\Vaisala\TWX300\sounds\.
When an Alert Condition begins, the Countdown value is set to the defined
number of seconds. This value is updated to reflect the number of seconds
remaining until the Alert Condition expires. Once the Countdown value reaches
zero (0), the Alert Condition is over.
184 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 8 ___________________________________________________ Understanding Alert Status
Table 29
Field
Acknowledge
Comments
Alerts Status—Data Field Columns (Continued)
Purpose
Indicates whether the Alarm has been acknowledged (the image of a clock is
dimmed when acknowledged). Use the Acknowledge button to acknowledge an
Alert condition. This turns the Beep and/or sound file off but the condition remains
until its timer counts down to zero. The acknowledgment is recorded in the Alarm
log file.
Displays current Alert Status
Determining Current Alerts Status
The Alerts Status window shows if a Warning Area has gone into Alert
mode. Use the Alerts Status window to Acknowledge an Alert. See
Figure 94 on page 186.
NOTE
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select View > Alerts Status.
The Alerts Status dialog box displays.
2.
The color red across a line item indicates the Warning Area is in
an Alert Status.
3.
Click the Windows Close button to complete the operation and
return to the Display.
Once a line item is in an Alert condition, a clock icon is displayed in
the line item
. Along with this, the line item turns red. The color red
across a line item indicates the item is in an Alert state.
Acknowledge an Alert
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select View > Alerts Status.
The Alerts Status dialog box displays.
2.
Select a source or Warning Area line item currently in Alert
mode from the Alert list. A red line and highlighted clock
indicate an Alert. See Figure 94 on page 186.
3.
In the Acknowledge column, click the appropriate alarm clock
icon to disable the beep from the PC.
4.
Click the Windows Close button to complete the operation and
return to the Display.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 185
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Figure 94
Alerts Status Window—In Alert Mode
186 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 8 ___________________________________________________ Understanding Alert Status
Configuring Alert Conditions
Warning Areas
This procedure assumes that you have already configured your
Warning Areas. Current configuration settings are determined by
observing tab parameters when first displaying the Alarms dialog box.
1.
With the Alarms dialog box displayed, click on the Warning
Areas tab. See Figure 95 below.
2.
Select a configured Warning Area from the WA column.
Figure 95
3.
Configuring an Alarm—Warning Areas
Set the following properties for the selected Warning Area:
Enabled—Select if you want to Enable the selected Warning
Area. A check mark displays in the Enabled column. The option
is disabled if the selected area is used in one or several equations.
Alert duration time [sec]—Enter a time value from 1 to 3600.
The time displays in the Time [sec] column. This is the value
used to assign the time period the selected Warning Area is in
Alert after the last discharge was received.
Visible—Select if you wish the selected Warning Area to be
viewable on the Display. A check mark displays in the Visible
column.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 187
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
CG—When the Cloud to ground option is selected, the Warning
Area goes into Alert mode when a CG event occurs within the
selected Warning Area
IC—When the Intra cloud option is selected, the Warning Area
goes into Alert mode when an IC event occurs within the selected
Warning Area.
Beep—Select if you want an audible PC beep to occur when the
selected Warning Area goes into Alert mode. A check mark
displays in the Beep column.
Use sound—Select if you want a sound file to play when the
selected Warning Area goes into Alert mode. A check mark
displays in the Sound column. The individual sound filenames
and paths are displayed in the Alert sound and Clear sound text
boxes.
This selection uses the default sound files provided during
installation. To use a sound file placed in a different location,
either copy the sound file to the default TWX300 sound file
location, or click
4.
to select another file location.
Click Save & Exit to save the changes and exit the dialog box.
Click Save to save the changes, and leave the dialog box
displayed.
NOTE
To test the Alarm sound currently used by the TWX300 application,
click
next to the appropriate filename and path.
188 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 8 ___________________________________________________ Understanding Alert Status
EFM
This procedure assumes that you have already configured your electric
field mill (EFM). Current configuration settings are determined by
observing tab parameters when first displaying the Alarms dialog box.
1.
With the Alarms dialog box displayed, click on the EFMs tab.
2.
Select a configured EFM from the EFM column.
Figure 96
3.
Configuring an Alarm—EFMs
Set the following properties for the selected EFM:
Enabled—Selecting enables the selected EFM. A check mark
displays in the Enabled column.
Beep—Select if you want an audible beep to occur when the
EFM goes into Alert mode. A check mark displays in the Beep
column.
4.
In the Threshold text box, enter a value from 0 to 10000 V/m.
The value displays in the Threshold column.
Example: If 1000 is entered, any discharge above 1000 V/m or
below -1000 V/m will set the EFM in Alert.
5.
In the Time [sec] text box, enter a value from 1 to 3600, this is
the time the Warning Area stays in Alert after the threshold was
last crossed. The value displays in the Time [sec] column.
6.
Click Save to apply all the changes made. No changes will take
effect until this button is clicked.
Click Save & Exit to save the changes and exit the dialog box.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 189
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
This page intentionally left blank.
190 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 9 ______________________________________________________ Viewing Lightning Data
CHAPTER 9
VIEWING LIGHTNING DATA
Data and Warning Area Limits
Data Limits
Data is limited to your subscribed data area or region. Contact Vaisala
for information on changing your limit.
Warning Limits
Your can create many Warning Areas, however you should limit the
number that are enabled. A high number of active Warning Areas can
make the system sluggish or even crash; depending upon system
resources.
The limit is dependant upon:
- Processor speed
- Amount and speed of the on-board RAM
- Quality and speed of the graphics display card
- Amount of Central data being received
- Map size and layers
- If a replay is being executed during a heavy period of lightning data
acquisition
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 191
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Discharge Types
TWX300 can display lightning data based on discharge type. Each
event type is represented by a unique event symbol that changes color
as data ages (see Appendix C, Data Aging on page 309). Table 30
below illustrates the symbol(s) used by TWX300 to indicate lightning
type; depending upon your selection in the Discharge Types dialog
box.
Table 30
Symbol
Discharge Type—Display Symbols
Indication
Branched cloud lightning (Intra-cloud (IC)). Available for Total
Lightning networks only
Cloud lightning (Intra-cloud (IC))
Positive cloud-to-ground lightning event (CG+) (two events
indicated here)
Negative cloud-to-ground lightning event (CG-) (two events
indicated here)
Initiation points. Available for Total Lightning networks only.
Displays the first point in an IC event, or an isolated IC event
IC event nodes. Available for Total Lightning networks only.
When selected, the IC count reflects the total number of nodes
displayed in the viewable area.
192 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 9 ______________________________________________________ Viewing Lightning Data
Displaying the Discharge Types
Dialog Box
- From the TWX300 Main menu, select View > Discharge Types.
The Discharge Types dialog box displays.
Figure 97
Discharge Types Dialog Box
Displaying a Specific Discharge
Type
When a check box is selected in the Discharge Type dialog box,
subsequent discharges of the type(s) selected are overlaid on the Area
Map. See Table 30 above and Figure 97 above.
- Selecting the Intra cloud check box displays cloud lightning events
only.
- Selecting the Positive cloud to ground check box displays cloudto-ground lightning events that are positive in polarity only.
- Selecting the Negative cloud to ground check box displays cloudto-ground lightning events that are negative in polarity only.
- Selecting the Initiation points check box displays the first point in
an IC event (available for LS8000 networks only).
- Selecting the Only IC nodes check box displays event nodes only.
NOTE
When using a Total Lightning data source (LDAR, LS8000) and when
checking only the Intra cloud check box, TWX300 displays dots
interconnected with lines to represent the structure of the IC event.
When both Intra cloud and the Initiation points check boxes are
checked, only the initiation points of the event are displayed.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 193
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
NOTE
Initiation points and Intra cloud nodes are visible only when Intra
cloud is selected in the Discharge Types dialog box. This feature is
available for LS8000 networks only.
Event Display—Appearance
Depending upon the check box(es) selected, TWX300 can display one
or all of the following discharge types over the Area Map. Figure 98
below illustrates only positive cloud-to-ground lightning (no IC or
negative cloud to ground lightning displayed).
Figure 98
Displaying Events
194 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 9 ______________________________________________________ Viewing Lightning Data
Display and Event Coordinates
Determining the Center Coordinate
of the Current Display Area
1.
In the TWX300 toolbar, click
displays.
2.
Observe and note the coordinates for latitude and longitude in the
Center coordinate panel.
Figure 99
. The Legend dialog box
Center Coordinates of the Display
Click the Legend Close button to close the Legend dialog box
and return to the Display.
Or:
Click on the Display to leave the Legend displayed and return to
the Area Map.
Or:
In the TWX300 toolbar, click
again to close the Legend.
NOTE
The center coordinate indicated is relative to the portion of the map
being displayed and the zoom factor.
NOTE
Lat. and Lon. text will display differently depending on whether the
Coordinate in DMS option is selected in the General Configuration
> Others tab.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 195
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Determining the Coordinates of an
Event
NOTE
Using either method described here, Lat. and Lon. text will display
differently depending on whether the Coordinate in DMS option is
selected in the General Configuration > Others tab.
Method One
1.
In the TWX300 toolbar, click
mode
2.
.
Left-click on an event as illustrated in Figure 100 below. The
Inspector dialog box displays.
Figure 100
3.
Selecting an Event
Obtain event coordinate (Lat., Lon.) information from the center
of the Inspector dialog box. See Figure 101 below.
Figure 101
4.
. The cursor goes into Identify
Obtaining Event Coordinates Using Inspector
Click the Windows Close button to complete the operation and
return to the Display.
Method Two
This method provides an approximate location of a selected event.
1.
In the TWX300 toolbar, click
.
2.
Place the cursor directly over an event.
196 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 9 ______________________________________________________ Viewing Lightning Data
3.
Obtain the latitude and longitude from the TWX300 Status bar as
illustrated in Figure 102 below.
Figure 102
Obtaining Event Coordinates Using the Status
Bar
Determining the Current Cursor
Position (Latitude and Longitude)
- As the cursor is moved about the map area, the current latitude and
longitude can be determined by observing the Lat: Lon: panel in
the TWX300 Status bar.
Figure 103
Determining Current Cursor Coordinates
NOTE
Lat. and Lon. text will display differently depending on whether the
Coordinate in DMS option is selected in the General Configuration
> Others tab. Refer to Lat and Lon Boxes—DMS Option on page 99.
NOTE
It is recommended that you zoom in as close as possible to provide
greater accuracy when locating coordinates.
NOTE
It may be easier to select a specific location if you first toggle the
cursor by selecting
. This action toggles the cursor into crosshairs
mode; providing greater accuracy in your selection.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 197
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Viewing Event Specifics
Event Date and Time
1.
In the TWX300 toolbar, click
mode
.
2.
Left-click on an event. The Inspector dialog box displays. See
Figure 104 below.
3.
Observe the center of the Inspector dialog box and note the
Discharge date & time the event data was received.
4.
A more accurate time (decimal seconds) is displayed by
Inspector, in the Decimal second line for the selected event;
however, Decimal second must be first selected and defined as a
viewable field in the General Configuration dialog box,
Identify tab.
Figure 104
5.
NOTE
. The cursor goes into Identify
Using Inspector to View Event Date and Time
Click the Windows Close button to complete the operation and
return to the Display.
Lat. and Lon. text will display differently depending on whether the
Coordinate in DMS option is selected in the General Configuration
> Others tab.
198 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 9 ______________________________________________________ Viewing Lightning Data
Determining the Distance and
Bearing to an Event
1.
In the TWX300 toolbar, click
crosshairs cursor.
2.
Select the event that you want the physical distance and compass
bearing on.
3.
While selecting, hold the left mouse button and drag the cursor to
the destination (target) you want the distance and bearing from
(relative to the event). See Figure 105 below.
4.
Release the mouse button, the Distance & Bearing dialog box
with coordinate and distance information displays over the map.
Note the information.
5.
Click OK to close the dialog box.
Figure 105
NOTE
. The cursor changes to a
Determining Distance and Bearing
The above example is for illustrative purposes only. Greater accuracy
is possible by zooming in closer to the event and the location, or by
providing exact coordinates of a location.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 199
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Distance Line—Changing Color
To change the color of the distance line:
1.
Right-click on the map.
2.
Select the Map Navigator menu item.
3.
Right-click in Map Navigator. The Color dialog box displays.
4.
Select a color from the palette.
5.
Click the OK button. The Pen size dialog box displays.
If you want a thicker line, enter a new value here, or accept the
default.
6.
Click the OK button.
7.
Close Map Navigator.
200 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 9 ______________________________________________________ Viewing Lightning Data
Determining the Intensity of an
Event
List items displayed by Inspector are customized in the General
Configuration dialog box, Identify tab.
NOTE
The Lat. and Lon. text will display differently by Inspector depending
on whether the Coordinate in DMS option is selected in the General
Configuration > Others tab.
Method One
Using Inspector to Determine Event Intensity
1.
In the TWX300 toolbar, click
mode
2.
. The cursor goes into Identify
.
Left-click on an event. The Inspector dialog box displays.
If more than one event was selected (as indicated in the top-most
line of the dialog box below), use the drop-down list box and Up
and Down arrows to move through the list to select an individual
event.
3.
Obtain Intensity information of the selected event from the
Intensity line in the Inspector dialog box.
4.
Click the Windows Close button to complete the operation and
return to the Display.
Figure 106
Determining the Intensity of an Event Using
Inspector
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 201
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Note that 3 events were found in Figure 106 on page 201. Use the
information in Step 2 to obtain accurate information on an individual
event.
Method Two
Using Proportional Symbols (Fonts) to Determine
Event Intensity
TWX300 displays event symbols used to identify CG+, CG-, and CC
lightning, in font sizes proportional to the intensity of the event (small,
medium, large). Refer to Figure 107 below for detail and refer to
Figure 109 on page 204 for a screen shot of Proportional symbols in
use.
NOTE
Proportional font size is defined in the Proportional font intensity
max text box, General Configuration > Others tab.
The illustration below provides insight into determining event intensity
based on the absolute value entered in the Proportional font intensity
max text box (maximum intensity=largest symbol). In the example
below, assume 50kA (or greater) is entered in the Proportional font
intensity max text box, based on the entry, we then divide the value
into six Range Categories, 50kA. Therefore, the larger symbol size
would represent 50kA (or -50kA), while the smallest font represents 0
to 10kA, or 0 to -10kA.
Figure 107
Proportional Font Intensity—Range Categories
202 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 9 ______________________________________________________ Viewing Lightning Data
Table 31 below provides a chart describing font size versus intensity.
Table 31
Proportional Font Range Categories
Category
0 to 10, or -0 to -10kA
10 to 20, or -10 to -20kA
20 to 30, or -20 to -30kA
30 to 40, or -30 to -40kA
40 to 50+, or -40 to -50+kA
Font Size
Smallest font size
Next to smallest font size
Next larger font size
Next to the largest font size
Largest font size
Displaying Proportional Symbols (Fonts)
- In the TWX300 toolbar, click
Proportional Symbol mode.
Figure 108
. The Display goes into
Displaying Proportional Fonts
Disabling Proportional Symbols
- In the TWX300 toolbar, click
to Normal Symbol mode.
once again. The Display reverts
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 203
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Figure 109
Proportional Symbols Used in Determining Event
Intensity
Note the varying symbol (proportional font) sizes in Figure 109 above.
Highlighting the Last (New) Event
TWX300 flashes a lightning symbol
over the Area Map to indicate
the most recent event(s), permitting easy identification of new activity
on the Display. Refer to Figure 110 on page 205 for detail.
Enabling the Last Event Feature
Method One
- From the TWX300 Main menu, select View > Highlight Last
Event. A symbol indicates new events.
Method Two
1.
Select the Tools > Configuration Main menu item.
2.
Click the Others tab.
204 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 9 ______________________________________________________ Viewing Lightning Data
3.
In the Miscellaneous panel, select the
symbol indicates a new event.
option. A
New Event
Symbol
Density
Discharge
Figure 110
Using the New Event Symbol
The symbol is placed directly over the new event to aid in
determining event polarity. See Figure 111 below.
Figure 111
Last Event Highlighted
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 205
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Determining the Polarity of an Event
Method One
As lightning data is received, the discharge type (polarity) is plotted on
the Display using specific symbols to illustrate and identify the
event(s). The symbols used are described in Table 32 below.
Table 32
Symbol
Event Polarity Symbols
Polarity
Positive cloud-to-ground lightning event (CG+) (two events
indicated here)
Negative cloud-to-ground lightning event (CG-) (two events
indicated here)
Method Two
1.
In the TWX300 toolbar, click
mode
2.
. The cursor goes into Identify
.
Left-click on an event. The Inspector dialog box displays.
If more than one event was selected (as indicated in the top-most
line of the dialog box), use the drop-down list box to select an
individual event.
3.
Obtain lightning Polarity information from the Inspector dialog
box (or the drop-down list box as needed). See Figure 112
below.
Figure 112
4.
Determining Lightning Polarity
Click the Windows Close button to complete the operation and
return to the Display.
206 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 9 ______________________________________________________ Viewing Lightning Data
Determining Total Lightning Counts
Method One
Total Lightning Counts Using the Status Bar
- Observe and note the middle portion of the TWX300 Status bar. See
Figure 113 below
Counts displayed are for the viewable Display area. The
information is divided into the categories of Total, IC, CG+, and
CG-, and the values provided apply only to the data currently
displayed in the screen viewing
area.
Figure 113
Determining Total Lightning Counts Using the
Status Bar
Method Two
Total Lightning Counts Using the Monitor Window
- With the Monitor window displayed (Figure 114 below), observe
and note the information displayed in the lower left corner of the
dialog box.
Counts displayed apply only to the area selected in the Area dropdown list box. The information is divided into the categories of
Positive Cloud-to-ground, Negative Cloud-to-ground, Intracloud and Total counts.
Figure 114
Determining Total Lightning Counts Using
Monitor
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 207
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Viewing Event Information Using Inspector
The Inspector dialog box displays detailed lightning parameters and
information related to selected lightning data. The parameters listed by
Inspector can be customized using the Configuration dialog box,
Identify tab. See Appendix A, Inspector Parameters, on page 297 for
more detailed information on available parameters and units of
measure.
1.
In the toolbar, click
. The cursor goes into Identify mode
2.
Left-click on an event symbol. The Inspector dialog box
displays. See Figure 115 below.
.
Inspector Displaying
Discharge Data
Inspector Displaying IC
Data
Figure 115
3.
Viewing Event Information Using Inspector
View the data as needed.
NOTE
Decimal second is used by Inspector to make the reported discharge
time more accurate.
NOTE
The information displayed in Inspector changes when displaying IC
data.
208 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 9 ______________________________________________________ Viewing Lightning Data
No Lightning Found by Inspector
If you select an area where no lightning data is present, a message to
that effect displays. See Figure 116 below for detail.
- Click OK to close the message box, and return to the Display.
Figure 116
Nothing Found Message—Inspector
Using Map Legend Color Keys
Displaying Solid Colors for
Lightning Data Display
The default Legend colors used by TWX300 are solid. The colors used
in the Legend are applied to the displayed lightning data. The color
keys help identify event location along with the age of an event. Colors
may be changed to suit your needs by clicking on the color. Refer to
Figure 117 below.
Figure 117
Color Key Colors—Solid
Reverting to solid colors from gradient colors
1.
In the TWX300 toolbar, click
displays.
. The Legend dialog box
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 209
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
2.
Click
in the Legend to revert to solid colors used to indicate
the age of the lightning data.
This function works only while working in the Legend. If you
change the current Display view while working in the Legend,
(pan, zoom, etc.), then return to the Legend, the Undo button will
no longer function for the first view.
NOTE
The colors displayed on-screen are relative to the time period selected
from the Time-period length drop-down list box, and the current PC
time.
Displaying Gradient Colors for
Lightning Data Display
You can set Legend colors to display gradient colors instead of solid
colors. Refer to Figure 118 below. The colors used in the Legend are
applied to the displayed lightning data. The color keys help identify
event location along with the age of an event. Colors may be changed
to suit your needs by clicking on the color.
Figure 118
Color Key Colors—Gradient
Method One
The gradient colors displayed by the Map Legend, are based on the
colors used for the top and bottom solid colors.
1.
In the TWX300 toolbar, click
displays.
. The Legend dialog box
2.
Click
to display gradient colors used to indicate the age of
the lightning data.
210 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 9 ______________________________________________________ Viewing Lightning Data
3.
Click the Windows Close button to complete the operation and
return to the Display.
Method Two
The gradient colors displayed by the Map Legend, are based on the
colors selected for the top and bottom Solid colors.
NOTE
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select View > Legend. The
Legend dialog box displays.
2.
Click
to display gradient colors used to indicate the age of
the lightning data.
3.
Click the Windows Close button to complete the operation and
return to the Display.
The colors displayed are relative to the time period selected from the
Time-period length pull-down menu in the Legend dialog box, and
the current PC time.
Determining the Distance Between Objects
NOTE
Because the Scale Bar is scalable, do not zoom in and out (enlarge,
reduce) the Area Map once you have marked your straight edge or
string. Doing so will cause inaccuracies in determining distances.
Method One
1.
Place a straight edge, card stock, or string between the two
locations or objects in question on the Area Map.
Use string when measuring a curved line or multiple objects that
are not adjacent to one another.
2.
Make a mark, or otherwise distinguish, the two locations on the
straight edge or string.
3.
Locate the Map Scale Bar on the area map.
4.
Place the straight edge or string up against the Scale Bar and read
or determine the distance from the Scale Bar.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________211
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
5.
Convert the map units of measurement into the units you are
using, or are most convenient for you. (i.e. convert one mile into
63,360 inches, etc.).
Method Two
Determining the Distance and Bearing to an Event
1.
In the TWX300 toolbar, click
crosshairs cursor.
. The cursor changes to a
2.
Select the event that you want the physical distance and compass
bearing on.
3.
While selecting, hold the left mouse button and drag the cursor to
the destination (target) you want the distance and bearing from
(relative to the event).
4.
Release the mouse button, the Distance & Bearing dialog box
with coordinate and distance information displays over the map.
Note the information.
5.
Click OK to close the dialog box.
Printing the Display Area
Ensure that the printer you are using has been properly configured
before printing from the TWX300 application. Refer to your operating
system manual, along with any information that accompanied your
printer for information on configuring a specific printer.
Method One
- In the TWX300 toolbar, select
displays.
. The Windows Print dialog box
Method Two
- From the TWX300 Main menu, select File > Print. The Windows
Print dialog box displays.
212 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 9 ______________________________________________________ Viewing Lightning Data
Using Predefined Viewing Levels
When you zoom and pan to a specific portion of the Area Map that
holds a particular interest to you, you can save the view for later use.
TWX300 allows you to configure many specific zoom ranges, or zoom
targets. The zoom levels can be saved and loaded or removed as
needed. You are limited by your hardware resources as to the total
number of predefined zooms you can create and display. Once you
have accumulated several predefined zooms, they may be
automatically displayed one after another in a sequence, configured by
the user, using the Auto-Cycle check box.
Displaying the Predefined Zooms
Dialog Box
Method One
- Click
in the TWX300 toolbar. The Predefined Zooms dialog
box displays. See Figure 119 below.
Method Two
- From the TWX300 Main menu, select View > Predefined Zooms.
The Predefined Zooms dialog box displays. See Figure 119 below.
Figure 119
Predefined Zooms Dialog Box
Adding a Predefined Zoom
Predefined Zoom views allow you to quickly move to an area of
concern. If you configure more than one zoom level, they can be
displayed in a specific order and time period, or set to Auto-Cycle.
Many different zoom levels may be created and saved for later use
using the Create Order of Predefined Zooms dialog box. You are
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 213
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
limited by your hardware resources as to the limit of predefined zooms
you can create.
1.
Using
(Pan),
(Zoom In), and
(Zoom Out) in the
TWX300 toolbar, configure the Display around a map region as
needed.
2.
With the Predefined Zooms dialog box displayed, click
. The Zoom dialog box displays. See Figure 120
below.
Figure 120
Zoom Dialog Box
3.
Enter a unique name in the Enter the zoom name text box.
4.
Click OK.
5.
Click the Windows Close button to complete the operation and
return to the Display.
The new zoom level is available for use, and the name is
displayed in the Predefined zooms drop-down list box.
Removing a Predefined Zoom
NOTE
1.
With the Predefined Zooms dialog box displayed, select the
name of the predefined zoom you wish to delete from the dropdown list box.
2.
Click
. A Confirm dialog box requesting
confirmation displays.
3.
Click Yes to remove the zoom from the list.
4.
Click the Windows Close button to close the dialog box, and
return to the Display.
Once a predefined zoom is deleted from the Predefined Zooms list, it
cannot be undeleted or accessed.
214 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 9 ______________________________________________________ Viewing Lightning Data
Selecting a Saved Predefined Zoom
Level for Viewing
Method One
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select View > Predefined
Zooms. The Predefined Zooms dialog box displays.
2.
From the drop-down list box select the view you wish to display.
The screen updates, displaying the new view.
3.
Click the Windows Close button to complete the operation and
close the dialog box.
Method Two
1.
From the TWX300 toolbar, click
dialog box displays.
. The Predefined Zooms
2.
From the drop-down list box select the view you wish to display.
The screen updates, displaying the new view.
3.
Click the Windows Close button to complete the operation and
close the dialog box.
Configuring a Specific Predefined
Zoom Sequence
This action assumes you have already created and saved zoom levels.
1.
With the Predefined Zooms dialog box displayed, click Select
Sequence. The Create Order of Predefined Zooms dialog box
displays. See Figure 121 below.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 215
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Figure 121
Creating a Specific Zoom Sequence
2.
From the Available predefined zooms list box, select a
predefined zoom you wish to display.
3.
Click
to add the selected zoom to the Order for
Auto-Cycle zoom list box.
Click
to remove the zoom and place the selected file
in the Current Predefined Zooms list.
4.
Repeat the above process until you have all the predefined zooms
you want to display, listed in the Order for Auto-Cycle zoom
list box.
5.
Define the order in which you want the selected predefined
zooms to display by selecting a predefined zoom from the Order
for Auto-Cycle zoom list box.
6.
Click
list.
to move the selected file up one increment in the
Click
the list.
to move the selected file down one increment in
In Cycle Display Time [sec], enter a number between 5 and
10,800 seconds.
This is the length of time that each selected zoom is displayed
before the next predefined zoom in the list appears.
7.
Click OK to accept the changes and close the dialog box.
216 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 9 ______________________________________________________ Viewing Lightning Data
8.
NOTE
Click the Windows Close button to close the dialog box and
return to the display.
Only the zoom levels needed for display need be selected.
Length of Time a Predefined Zoom
is Displayed
This procedure assumes that you have already created additional zoom
views and that you have already created a Specific Predefined Zoom
Sequence.
1.
In the TWX300 toolbar, click
Zooms dialog box.
to display the Predefined
Or:
From the TWX300 Main menu, select View > Predefined
Zooms to display the Predefined Zooms dialog box.
2.
Click Select Sequence. The Create Order of Predefined Zooms
dialog box displays.
3.
Ensure that the zooms are in the correct sequence that you want
them displayed.
4.
In the Cycle display time [sec] text box, enter a value between 5
and 10,800 seconds.
5.
Click OK to accept the changes and close the Create Order of
Predefined Zooms dialog box.
6.
If you want to immediately display predefined zooms, select the
Auto-Cycle check box. If not, skip to the next step.
7.
Click the Windows Close button to close the Predefined Zooms
dialog box.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 217
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Image Synchronization—Display
and Predefined Zooms
1.
With the General Configuration dialog box displayed, click the
Others tab.
2.
In the Automatic image save panel, enable the Auto-cycle
zoom synch. function.
Selecting causes a new screen shot to be taken whenever a
predefined zoom cycles. The Auto-cycle zoom and Automatic
image save functions are synchronized. Images are saved to the
path displayed in the Automatic image save panel.
Auto-Cycle Predefined Zooms
This procedure assumes that you have already created additional zoom
views and that you have already configured a specific zoom sequence.
Enabling Auto-Cycle Mode
1.
With the Predefined Zooms dialog box displayed, select the
Auto-Cycle check box. The Predefined Zooms dialog box goes
into Auto-Cycle mode. Refer to Figure 122 below for detail.
2.
Click the Windows Close button to close the dialog box.
Figure 122
Predefined Zooms—Auto-Cycle Mode
Disabling Auto-Cycle Mode
- Repeat Step 1 above and un check the Auto-Cycle check box before
closing.
NOTE
The Display continues to Auto-Cycle as long as the Auto-Cycle
option is selected, even when the dialog is closed.
218 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 9 ______________________________________________________ Viewing Lightning Data
Creating and Saving Image Files
TWX300 permits you to manually save an image of the currently
displayed map area, as well as giving you an option to automatically
save image files at regular intervals. The application name, zoom name
(if synchronous), current date and time, the number of discharges
displayed and the connection status, along with the Vaisala logo are
displayed on the saved image.
The following items are also saved in the image file if they are open at
the time the image is saved:
- Legend window
- Monitor window
- Histogram window
- Alerts Status window
- Monitor window
- RADS and Relays Status window
- Any EFM values that display
NOTE
Some image formats create larger files than others. Therefore you may
need more storage space and may fill your disk sooner. Keep this in
mind when selecting a graphic format.
Automatically Saving an
Image—Periodically
NOTE
You must be licensed to enable this feature.
1.
With the General Configuration dialog box displayed, click the
Others tab.
2.
In the Automatic image save panel (Figure 123 on page 220),
select the Enabled check box to enable the function.
3.
In the Period text box, enter the time period (in seconds) you
want between screen shots.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 219
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
4.
Using the Format drop-down list, select a file type for the saved
image file. Supported format types include:
.GIF
.JPEG
.BMP
.TIF
.PNG
.PS
5.
Select Auto-cycle zoom synch. if you want to automatically
save an image every time the Auto-cycle zoom changes.
Automatic image save must be Enabled for this function to
operate.
When selected, the Period text box is grayed-out; and the image
save time period is set to the interval configured in the Create
Order of Predefined Zooms dialog box.
6.
From the Display mode options, select the Display mode in
which you want the image files to be taken.
Figure 123
7.
Automatic Image Save Panel
In the Discharges path & name text box (Figure 124 below),
enter the path where you want the saved files to be located; or
use the default.
Figure 124
Save Image Path Entry
8.
This is the location where images automatically created in the
Discharges mode are saved.
9.
To the right of the text box, enter a naming convention you want
your files to use, or use the default.
10.
In the Density path & name text box, enter the path where you
want the saved files to be located, or use the default.
11.
This is the location where images automatically created in the
Density mode are saved.
220 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 9 ______________________________________________________ Viewing Lightning Data
12.
To the right of the text box, enter a naming convention you want
your files to use; or use the default.
13.
To the right of the text box, enter a naming convention you want
your files to use; or use the default.
14.
Click Save & Exit to save the changes and return to the Display.
Manually Saving an Image File
You do not need to be licensed to use this feature; it is always
available. All saved images capture the currently displayed map area
and zoom level.
1.
Pan, move, zoom, etc., to display the portion of the Area Map
you want to save as an image file.
2.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select File > Save Image. The
Save Image dialog box displays (Figure 125 below).
Figure 125
3.
Save Image Dialog Box
Select a format for the image from the Save as type drop-down.
Supported format types include:
.GIF
.JPEG
.BMP
.TIF
.PNG
.PS
4.
In the File name box, enter a unique name for the image file.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 221
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
5.
Select a location path for the file to be saved. It is recommended
that you create a separate folder for image files.
6.
Click Save. The file is saved to the selected location.
Figure 126
Saved Image—Example
Image Filenames—Format
A file name consists of a fixed part (enclosed by ") and a dynamic part
that accommodates the date and time values. Image file names are
composed of specifiers that represent values inserted into the formatted
name. Some specifiers (such as "d"), simply format numbers or strings.
Table 33 below describes specifiers. Specifiers are given in lower case.
With the exception of the "am/pm" and "a/p" specifiers, case is ignored
in formats.
Table 33
Specifier
d
dd
ddd
dddd
e
Image Filename Specifiers
Display Format
Displays the day as a number without a leading zero (1-31).
Displays the day as a number with a leading zero (01-31).
Displays the day as an abbreviation (Sun-Sat in English locale).
Displays the day as a full name (Sunday-Saturday in English
locale).
Displays the year in the current period/era as a number without a
leading zero (Japanese, Korean and Taiwanese locales only).
222 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 9 ______________________________________________________ Viewing Lightning Data
Table 33
Image Filename Specifiers (Continued)
Specifier Display Format
ee
Displays the year in the current period/era as a number with a
leading zero (Japanese, Korean and Taiwanese locales only).
g
Displays the period/era as an abbreviation (Japanese and
Taiwanese locales only).
gg
Displays the period/era as a full name. (Japanese and
Taiwanese locales only).
m
Displays the month as a number without a leading zero (1-12). If
the m specifier immediately follows an h or hh specifier, the
minute rather than the month is displayed.
mm
Displays the month as a number with a leading zero (01-12). If
the mm specifier immediately follows an h or hh specifier, the
minute rather than the month is displayed.
mmm
Displays the month as an abbreviation (Jan-Dec in English
locale).
mmmm
Displays the month as a full name (January-December in
English locale).
yy
Displays the year as a two-digit number (00-99).
yyyy
Displays the year as a four-digit number (0000-9999).
h
Displays the hour without a leading zero (0-23).
hh
Displays the hour with a leading zero (00-23).
n
Displays the minute without a leading zero (0-59).
nn
Displays the minute with a leading zero (00-59).
s
Displays the second without a leading zero (0-59).
ss
Displays the second with a leading zero (00-59).
z
Displays the millisecond without a leading zero (0-999).
zzz
Displays the millisecond with a leading zero (000-999).
am/pm
Uses the 12-hour clock for the preceding h or hh specifier, and
displays 'am' for any hour before noon, and 'pm' for any hour
after noon. The am/pm specifier can use lower, upper, or mixed
case, and the result is displayed accordingly.
a/p
Uses the 12-hour clock for the preceding h or hh specifier, and
displays 'a' for any hour before noon, and 'p' for any hour after
noon. The a/p specifier can use lower, upper, or mixed case, and
the result is displayed accordingly.
/
Displays the date separator character.
:
Displays the time separator character.
’xx’/"xx" Characters enclosed in single or double quotes are displayed
as-is, and do not affect formatting.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 223
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Examples:
Assume the current date and time is February 15, 2007, 13:02:26,
while the image format is GIF:
- "MyImageFile_"hhnnss will build MyImageFile_130226.gif filename
-
yyyymmdd_hhnnss will build 20070215_130226.gif filename
-
yyyy"_MyImageFile_"mmdd will build 2007_MyImageFile_0215.gif
filename
- "DISCH_"yyyymmdd_hhnnss build DISCH_20070215_130226.gif
filename
224 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 10 ____________________________________________________ Querying Lightning Data
CHAPTER 10
QUERYING LIGHTNING DATA
You can request detailed flash data in a user-specified time and region
for the currently loaded lightning data file.
- In the TWX300 Main menu, select Tools > Query Data. The Query
Data dialog box displays. See Figure 127 below.
When the Date drop-down list box button is clicked, a calendar
displays. Click the right or left arrows located in the Month title bar
to scroll through the months of the year.
Figure 127
Query Data Dialog Box
Default Date and Time
Default date and time boundaries are set to the current Display location
and time. If you want to change the Date, Time or location of the query
follow the procedure below.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 225
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Query Specific Lightning Data
1.
In the TWX300 Main menu, select Tools > Query Data. The
Query Data dialog box displays.
When the Date drop-down list box button is clicked, a calendar
displays. Click the right or left arrows located in the Month title
bar to scroll through the months of the year.
2.
Select a beginning date from the Start date & time calendar.
3.
Select an ending date from the End date & time calendar.
4.
Select a beginning time from the Start date & time spin box.
5.
Select an ending time from the End date & time spin box.
6.
In the Longitude range text box, enter the inner limits of the
longitude for the area you want to query.
7.
In the Longitude range - to text box, enter the outer limits of the
longitude for the area you want to query.
8.
In the Latitude range text box, enter the inner limits of the
longitude for the area you want to query.
9.
In the Latitude range - to text box, enter the outer limits of the
longitude for the area you want to query.
10.
Click OK to begin the Query process.
When the query is complete, Notepad displays the results as
illustrated in Figure 128 below. Interpret the results.
Figure 128
Query Lightning Data Results
Table 34 below describes query result fields.
Table 34
Data Query—Field Descriptions
Date
Time
Mult
Date of file Time of stroke Number of strokes
in the flash
Long
Longitude of
stroke
Lat
Latitude of
stroke
kA
Type
Magnitude IC or CG
of stroke
226 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 10 ____________________________________________________ Querying Lightning Data
Intra-cloud (IC) Data
Intra-cloud lightning data display as a series of nodes interconnected
by straight lines called branches. See Figure 129 below. These
branches aid in visualizing IC data.
Clicking on a single node displays the Inspector window, which
changes the information types displayed to those types related to IC
events. For more information on nodes and their associated
Discrimination values, refer to Understanding Discrimination Values
on page 230.
IC Data
Figure 129
NOTE
Intra-Cloud Lightning Over the Area
Map—Close Up
The CP and LS8000 use all six Discrimination values (0 through 5),
Type 97 uses IC and CG data and Discrimination values of 0 and 4,
Type 96 uses CG data only and a Discrimination value of 4. The
Discrimination value can be obtained by viewing the archive file of an
event. Refer to Understanding Discrimination Values on page 230.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 227
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Figure 130
IC Data Displayed Over an Area Map With
Inspector
228 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 10 ____________________________________________________ Querying Lightning Data
Understanding Initiation Points
When both Intra-cloud and Initiation points are selected in the
Discharge Types dialog box, only the first point (initiation point) of
each event branch (Figure 130 on page 228) is displayed. The Initiation
points option can only be used when using LDAR or LS8000 data. See
Figure 131 below.
Points
Figure 131
NOTE
Initiation Points Displayed Over the Area
Map—Close Up
The CP and LS8000 use all six Discrimination values (0 through 5),
Type 97 uses IC and CG data and Discrimination values of 0 and 4,
Type 96 uses CG data only and a Discrimination value of 4. The
Discrimination value can be obtained by viewing the archive file of an
event. refer to Understanding Discrimination Values on page 230.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 229
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Understanding Discrimination Values
TWX300 (or Central when using a LS8000 sensor) assigns a value to
lightning discharges; this value is termed the Discrimination Value.
Figure 132
IC Data Displayed Over the Area Map—Close Up
- The total number of nodes associated with an event is listed in
Inspector
- The Discrimination value represents the location of a stroke within
an event
- The Discrimination value can be obtained by viewing the archive
file of an event.
Table 35 below lists possible Discrimination Values and their
associated meaning.
NOTE
For greater accuracy, the cursor must be placed directly over a node
before clicking.
Table 35
Value
0 or 10
1 or 11
2 or 12
3 or 13
4
5
Discrimination Values
Meaning
Isolated IC
Start of branched IC (also called initiation point)
IC node of a branched IC
End of branched IC
CG return stroke
CG subsequent lightning
230 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 10 ____________________________________________________ Querying Lightning Data
IC Node Breakdown
This section describes node breakdown of IC lightning.
Point number values in Figure 133 below are not a part of the data
packet. The value is included to help with understanding the algorithm.
Point 1 has been detected before Point 2, which was detected before
Point 3, etc.
The Relative Index indicates where to link the actual point. It gives the
number of a point, before the current one, which to connect to. For
example: Point 7 has a Relative Index of 3, meaning that it is
connected to Point 7-3 = 4, Point 3 has a Relative Index of 1 which
means that is it connected with the previous received sample, Point 2.
The Discrimination Value provides information that the point is a start
of flash (1 or 10 indicate the initiation point of a flash), a node of a
flash (2 or 12) or the end of a flash (3 or 13).
If multiplicity is detected, the first stroke in the flash is stored with a
Discrimination value of 4, while subsequent strokes are stored with a
Discrimination value of 5. Table 35 on page 230 describes node values.
Point
8
Relative Index 3
Discrimination 3
3
Point
Relative Index 1
Discrimination 2
5
Point
Relative Index 1
Discrimination 2
4
Point
Relative Index 2
Discrimination 2
2
Point
Relative Index 1
Discrimination 2
1
Point
Relative Index 0
Discrimination 1
7
Point
Relative Index 3
Discrimination 2
6
Point
Relative Index 4
Discrimination 2
Figure 133
IC Node Breakdown
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 231
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Table 36 below describes Point ID values.
Table 36
Point ID Values
Point
Point ID
Point Discrimination
Relative Index
NOTE
Meaning
The Point ID refers to point occurrence and position
(in the list, Point 1 arrived before Point 2, which
arrived before Point 3, etc.)
The Point Discrimination value provides initiation
point information and end of flash information.
The Relative Index provides the Point ID value to
connect the actual point to.
The CP and LS8000 use all six discrimination values (0 through 5).
Type 97 will use IC and CG data and Discrimination values of 0 and 4.
Type 96 will use CG data only and a Discrimination value of 4.
A Relative Index defined as 0, indicates the node is not connected to
the previous IC and is the initiation point of the IC event. The field
Relative Index, in the Inspector dialog box, provides the index of the
previous sample to connect to.
232 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 11 ____________________________________________ Replaying TWX300 Lightning Data
CHAPTER 11
REPLAYING TWX300 LIGHTNING DATA
TWX300 provides a method for replaying buffered data, or an
archived data file over the Area Map. Using one of three Replay
functions, or types, TWX300 permits the replay of buffered or
archived lightning data. Refer to Table 37 below for details on Replay
types.
Table 37
Replay Types
Replay Type
Purpose
Standard
Allows you to replay archived lightning data. See Standard
Replay on page 238.
Live
Updates at the end of every loop, up to the current time, then
plots all new lightning data received during the replay of the
previous loop. See Live Replay on page 243.
HotKey
Allows you to replay recent lightning data (data still in the
buffer). See Hotkey Replay on page 244.
Diagnostic
An off-line diagnostic tool used to indicate system
performance. See Diagnostic Replay on page 249.
NOTE
For information on the Status bar during replay see Understanding the
Status Bar on page 64.
NOTE
For information on the Legend colors during Replay, see Interaction of
Map Legend Colors and Replay on page 315.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 233
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
NOTE
Before an .avi file can be viewed on any operating system or application that supports the .avi format, the XviD codec must be installed
from the Installation CD. For recommended configuration settings see
TWX300 Video Configuration on page 235.
RADS and Relays During Replay
During Standard Replay, the RADS and Relays Status window
displays actual real-time status.
During Diagnostic Replay, the status of the RADS and Relays are
replayed as well. By observing the RADS and Relays Status window
during the replay, you can determine actual conditions of RADS and
Relays during the timeline selected.
Figure 134
RADS and Relays During Diagnostic Replay
234 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 11 ____________________________________________ Replaying TWX300 Lightning Data
TWX300 Video Configuration
Before creating videos for replay it is necessary you properly configure
the encoder the TWX300 application uses when processing usercreated videos.
TWX300 employs the XviD codec for compressing replay videos.
Installation instructions accompany the Installation CD; the settings
presented here are recommended.
Accessing the Setup Screen
1.
After the TWX300 installation is complete, you can access the
XviD Configuration dialog box by clicking
application root directory.
in the TWX300
This action will also allow you to install the codec if you have
not already done so.
2.
After accessing the XviD Installation Wizard, click Next.
3.
Follow all screen prompts until you arrive at the Select
Additional Tasks screen displaying the Decode all supported
FourCCs.option (approximately 6-screens).
4.
Select the Decode all supported FourCCs option.
The Decode all supported FourCCs option gives you the ability
to choose the encoder to be used to compress the video.
Select this Option
Figure 135
Properly Selecting TWX300 Video Options
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 235
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
5.
Click the Next button and continue with the installation until it is
complete.
Basic Configuration
1.
Open Windows Explorer.
2.
In the XVID directory, open Configure Encoder. The XviD
Configuration dialog box displays. See Figure 136 below.
Setting Displays Here
Figure 136
3.
Configuring the Video Encoder
Define the quality of the compression for your video. See Figure
136 above.
- For a small .avi file, click the Target quantizer button and
define a value of 6.
- For a high quality .avi file, click the Target quantizer
button and define a value of 1.
4.
Click Ok to accept the configuration and close the dialog box.
The resulting .avi file will still be about 20 times smaller than a
file that is not compressed.
236 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 11 ____________________________________________ Replaying TWX300 Lightning Data
High Quality Video
For the best quality .avi file:
1.
Access the Build Video dialog box.
2.
Uncheck the Compress check box. See Figure 137 below.
Figure 137
NOTE
Defining High Quality Video Output
The resulting file may be very large. Remember to backup your video
files.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 237
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Standard Replay
TWX300 permits viewing archived lightning data. Archive filenames
include a time stamp (the time in UTC the data was started) the system
uses as a reference when locating files. Once you have selected a
replay start and stop time, the TWX300 Status bar turns blue. TWX300
accesses the appropriate archive file and loads the data into memory
with the time tag of each report used to determine when in time the
replay begins. Data can then be replayed backwards or forwards at
selected speeds.
For Standard Replay there are options for Start, Stop, Pause, and
Resume; along with options allowing you to replay the data at a faster
or slower speed. An option to step backwards or continue forwards is
provided. Replay progress is displayed in the Progress meter, located
directly above the dialog box Status bar.
During the replay, TWX300 does not check the data being replayed for
Warning Areas. TWX300 continues the real-time operation of
acquiring and archiving real-time data. TWX300 performs its usual
interrogation of data, and displays Warning Area Alert states in the
Alerts Status window. Warning Area styles reflect current Alert status
along with the RADS and Relays Status window.
NOTE
The Replay feature can replay 24 hours of data (maximum) at one
time.
Displaying the Replay Dialog Box
Method One
- In the TWX300 toolbar, select
displays. See Figure 138 below.
. The Replay dialog box
Method Two
- From the TWX300 Main menu, select Replay > Standard. The
Replay dialog box displays. See Figure 138 below.
238 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 11 ____________________________________________ Replaying TWX300 Lightning Data
Figure 138
Replay Dialog Box
The Replay Status bar consists of two panels that display Replay
status. The first panel indicates the position of the file, the second
panel displays the speed of the replay (when either the Increase or
Decrease Speed button is clicked, the new speed is displayed in the
Speed panel).
Table 38 below describes Replay dialog box button functions.
Table 38
Button
Replay Dialog Box—Functions
Function
A
Play
B
Pause
C
Stop
D
Backward
E
Forward
F
Increase replay speed (default speed is 300 sec)
G
Decrease replay speed
H
Live Replay function
I
Save to .avi function. Access Build Video function
J
Minimize dialog box button
Replay status and speed are displayed in the Replay status bar.
- The maximum replay period allowed is 24 hours. If you specify
start and stop times outside this range you are prompted to enter
acceptable values.
- During Replay, the Replay data time is displayed in the TWX300
clock.
- Once the replay is started, the replay will commence and loop until
you cancel the replay.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 239
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
- The default Date and Time is displayed when the Replay dialog box
displays for the previous 24-hour period.
NOTE
In all Replay modes, Warning Areas reflect current real-time
conditions.
Minimizing the Replay Dialog Box
- In the Replay dialog box toolbar, click
minimizes.
. The Replay dialog box
Maximizing the Replay Dialog Box
1.
Right-click on the Replay dialog box title bar.
2.
Select Restore from the menu.
Closing the Replay Dialog Box
1.
Right-click on the Replay dialog box title bar.
2.
Select Close from the menu.
Setting Replay Speed
Speed is defined as the number of seconds of data displayed in one
frame. The Replay function displays data frame by frame. Speed
selections range from 1 to 14400 seconds (4 hours). If one second is
used, you will see every frame of the original file. If you select a value
of 14400 to display 24 hours of data (using the Increase Speed button),
Replay will display six screens of data.
- Replay speed is displayed in percent in the Replay dialog box title
bar.
- Replay speed is displayed in seconds at the right-most portion of the
Replay dialog box status bar as indicated in Figure 139 below.
240 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 11 ____________________________________________ Replaying TWX300 Lightning Data
Figure 139
Replay Speed
Replaying a Data Video
Videos produced by TWX300 have a default extension of .avi. Once
produced, the video can be replayed on any operating system or
application that supports the .avi format. This allows files to be
viewed on a variety of machines and permits easy transfer of the file;
however, using the included player permits you to move forwards or
backwards in the file incrementally.
1.
Locate the .avi file you want to play.
By default movie files are saved to:
Windows XP - C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Application Data\VAISALA\TWX300\video
Windows Vista and 7 C:\ProgramData\VAISALA\TWX300\video
2.
Double-click on the .avi filename. The movie plays using the
configured default player.
The filename displays in the title bar.
NOTE
An TWX300 created .avi file can be viewed on any operating system
or application that supports the .avi format if the XviD codec has
been installed from the TWX300 Installation CD and is used to create
the video.
NOTE
It is recommended that you create a separate folder for storing or
archiving TWX300 videos.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 241
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
NOTE
Refer to your system documentation for information on use of the
appropriate player, and controls, for your operating system.
Loading a Specific Data File for
Replay
1.
With the Replay dialog box displayed, select a beginning date
from the From date drop-down list box.
When the drop-down list box button is clicked, a calendar
displays. Click the right or left arrows located in the Month title
bar to scroll through the months of the year. See Figure 140
below.
Figure 140
Replay—Selecting a Beginning Date
2.
Select a beginning time from the From time Spin box.
3.
Select an ending date from the To date drop-down list box.
4.
Select an ending time from the To time Spin box.
5.
Using the Replay function buttons, replay the lightning data.
TWX300 goes into Replay mode.
View the progress of the file in the Progress bar.
6.
NOTE
When done viewing the file, click the Windows Close button to
close the Replay dialog box, and return TWX300 to Real-Time
mode.
TWX300 can replay 24 hours of archived data.
242 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 11 ____________________________________________ Replaying TWX300 Lightning Data
NOTE
The Status bar indicates when the Display is in Replay mode.
Live Replay
A Live Replay updates at the end of every loop, up to the current time,
then plots all new lightning data received during the replay of the
previous loop. EFMs reflect real-time data and are not affected by the
Live Replay mode.
If the New event highlight option is selected in the Configuration
dialog box, Others tab; TWX300 continues to mark new lightning
events as they are received.
Starting Live Replay
Click
in the Replay dialog box during the replay to activate the
Live Replay function. The Live Replay button blinks when the Live
Replay function is activated
The live replay function will perform a replay loop based on the Timeperiod length selected in the Legend window. The From and To date
and time fields will automatically be adjusted by the live replay
function.
Example: If you want your live replay function looping over a 3 hours
time window, please follow the steps below:
1.
In the Legend window select 30 minutes in the Time-period
length drop down:
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 243
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
2.
Open the replay window:
3.
Ensuring the replay is not running (grayed Stop button). Click on
the Live replay button:
.
Hotkey Replay
Instant replay of lightning data can be accessed by pressing the
appropriate Function key. The replay plays once through the selected
time period, then the system returns to real-time Display and
operations. Depending on the HotKey selected, the mode replays the
past 30, 60, 90, or 120 minutes of data. Refer to Table 39 on page 245
for detail.
During the replay, TWX300 does not check the data being replayed for
Warning Area Alert states. TWX300 continues the real-time operation
of acquiring and archiving real-time data. TWX300 performs its usual
interrogation of data, and displays Warning Area Alert states in the
Alerts Status window. Warning Areas remain on the map, and in the
same Alert state they were in when Replay was initiated; however, the
Warning Areas will go into an Alert state if new lightning data moves
into the Warning Area(s).
During HotKey Replay, a message indicating that HotKey Replay is in
use is displayed in the Status bar; and indicates the length of time
selected for replay, and the Status bar changes to blue.
244 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 11 ____________________________________________ Replaying TWX300 Lightning Data
Using HotKeys
TWX300 allows you to replay data currently in the buffer using the
HotKey function. While HotKey Replay is being used a message
indicating that HotKey replay is in use is displayed in the Status bar;
the message includes the length of time (data) being replayed. The
EFM display is not affected by this function.
- Press the appropriate Function key to replay data. The Display
automatically goes into HotKey Replay mode, and the Status bar
turns blue. The words HotKey replay, and the replay length (time)
are also displayed in the Status bar.
Table 39 below provides key versus data length information.
Table 39
HotKey
F5
F6
F7
F8
HotKey Replay—Data Length
Data length
Replays the last 30 minutes of lightning data
Replays the last 60 minutes of lightning data
Replays the last 90 minutes of lightning data
Replays the last 120 minutes of lightning data
Example: Pressing the F5 HotKey replays the last 30 minutes of
buffered data.
HotKey Replay Frame Rates
Each replay is divided into 6 frames; therefore each frame replays two
minutes of event data. Table 40 below describes frame rates.
Table 40
Replay Frame Rate Versus Time
Frame number
1
2
3
4
5
6
NOTE
Time period covered
Displays data from 08:10:00 to 08:15:00
Displays data from 08:15:00 to 08:20:00
Displays data from 08:20:00 to 08:25:00
Displays data from 08:25:00 to 08:30:00
Displays data from 08:30:00 to 08:35:00
Displays data from 08:35:00 to 08:40:00
When TWX300 finishes replaying the data, TWX300 reverts to RealTime mode.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 245
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Building a Data Video for Replay
TWX300 allows you to build a video of replayed data. Using the
Replay and Build video dialog boxes, you can replay lightning data
and make a movie of that data for viewing at a later date.
The Build Video dialog box allows you to produce a video in .avi
format from selected archive files. The .avi file, once built, is
available for viewing with any application that supports the .avi
format.
Displaying the Build Video Dialog
Box
1.
From the TWX300 toolbar, click
displays.
. The Replay dialog box
Or:
From the TWX300 Main menu, select Replay > Standard.
2.
In the Replay dialog box, click
. The Build Video dialog box
displays and the Display screen resolution is set to 800 x 600
pixels. The Build Video dialog box displays. See Figure 141
below.
.
Figure 141
Displaying the Build Video Dialog Box
246 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 11 ____________________________________________ Replaying TWX300 Lightning Data
Building a Data Video
1.
In the TWX300 toolbar, click
. The Replay dialog box
displays, and the Display goes into Replay mode.
Or:
From the TWX300 Main menu, select Replay > Standard. The
Replay dialog box displays, and the Display goes into Replay
mode.
NOTE
2.
Select a starting date from the From drop-down list box.
3.
Select a starting time from the From drop-down list box.
4.
Select an ending date from the From drop-down list box.
5.
Select an ending time from the From drop-down list box.
If you don’t want the video to start at the beginning of the replay,
launch the Replay and click
at the place you want the video start.
6.
Verify all settings in the Replay dialog box.
7.
Click
to display the Build Video dialog box.
8.
Click
to display the Save As dialog box.
It is recommended that you create a separate folder for storing
and archiving TWX300 data videos. The default path for storing
and archiving data videos is:
Windows XP - C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Application Data\VAISALA\TWX300\video
Windows Vista and 7 C:\ProgramData\VAISALA\TWX300\video
9.
Enter a filename for the video you are creating in the File name
text box.
10.
Select the path where you want to save the file.
11.
Click Save. The Save As dialog box closes.
12.
In the Build Video dialog box, the file name displays in the text
field.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 247
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
13.
Set the Speed (samples/secs) of the Replay from 1 to 100.
14.
The higher the value, the faster the data is displayed (default is
9).
15.
If you want the file to be compressed, select the Compress check
box. TWX300 will use the codec selected to compile the video.
A compressed video size is more than 100 times smaller (file
size) than the un compressed one.
16.
From the Codec pull-down menu, select a codec to use. XviD is
the recommended choice.
17.
In the Replay dialog box, click
to begin the movie-making
process. The Display enters Replay mode.
Observe the Progress bar in the Replay dialog box, as well as the
Progress bar in the Build Video dialog box.
NOTE
The recording will automatically stop after the completion of one
loop.
Stopping the Recording Session
In the Replay dialog box, click
, or click the Windows Close button
to complete the operation and close the dialog box.
NOTE
Do not forget to close the Build Video dialog box. If you neglect to
close the dialog box and relaunch Replay, the previously-created data
video file is replaced.
NOTE
The MediaPlayer.exe provided in the TWX300 directory is
customized for the replay of TWX300 video files, and has the ability
to step incrementally forwards and backwards through the lightning
video.
248 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 11 ____________________________________________ Replaying TWX300 Lightning Data
NOTE
An TWX300 created .avi file can be viewed on any operating system
or application that supports the .avi format if the XviD codec has
been installed from the TWX300 Installation CD and is used to create
the video.
NOTE
For information on video behavior, refer to the ReadMe.txt file on the
Installation CD.
Diagnostic Replay
Diagnostic Replay, Figure 142, is an off-line diagnostic replay tool. It
will replay the archived lightning position and EFM data and set-off or
clear Alarms as one would observe while watching an event occur in
the TWX300 application. This better simulates the real-time
performance of the TWX300 system and provides you with an accurate
representation of how the system performs in real-time.
Because the function is entered via the TWX300 Application Launcher
and not from within the TWX300 application, Diagnostic Replay mode
cannot be used while the main TWX300 application is running.
Another reason Diagnostic Replay mode should be run alone, is that
this replay mode consumes many system resources.
Vaisala recommends that the TWX300 Diagnostic Replay function
only be used after thunderstorm activity has cleared your area. This is
because TWX300 will not ingest real-time data while Diagnostic
Replay mode is in use.
For information on selecting a file for replay, see Loading a Specific
Data File for Replay on page 242.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 249
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Figure 142
Diagnostic Replay Display
RADS and Relay Actions
Diagnostic Replay allows replay of lightning position data and EFM
data archived at the user site in the same fashion as the main TWX300
application's standard Replay mode. During Diagnostic Replay, actual
relay settings and RADS displays will not react as if the system were
ingesting live data. Only Warning Areas, the EFM status window, the
RADS/Relays status window and the Information window indicate the
Alert states and actions based on the replayed data.
250 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 11 ____________________________________________ Replaying TWX300 Lightning Data
Speed Intervals
During Diagnostic Replay, lightning position data include a 40-second
lag time (configured by changing Central lag time) to simulate the
real-time difference in the reception of the lightning position data and
EFM data. Central lag time can be adjusted to best represent the local
delay in retrieval of lightning data due to the inherent satellite
transmission and/or central processor delays.
The default speed of the replay is in 10-second intervals, configured by
the user. Data are checked every interval, so if the user forces a 10second interval, the Alert time-stamp will be rounded off to the 10second interval replayed. If you want to replay the exact behavior of
the TWX300 main application, it is recommended you set the replay
interval to 1 second.
Diagnostic Replay Actions
The Diagnostic Replay window is similar to that of the TWX300 main
application; however, the following features are different during
Diagnostic Replay:
- The tool bar displays red to indicate the data is not real-time and the
taskbar will move from right to left.
- You can open a configuration file, but it cannot be modified.
- Density replay is not available.
- The Query data window and Test RADS and Relays window are not
accessible.
- Warning areas can be edited and added and EFM warning
thresholds can be adjusted. All changes are discarded when quitting.
- Most Configuration options can be changed, but as soon as you quit
the TWX300 Diagnostic Replay, all changes are discarded.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 251
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
This page intentionally left blank.
252 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 12 _______________________________________________ TWX300 System Configuration
CHAPTER 12
TWX300 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Determining Your Licensed Data Region
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select Tools > Configuration.
The Enter Password dialog box displays.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The General Configuration dialog box
displays.
4.
Click the General tab.
5.
In the Licenses panel, observe and note the Latitude range
coordinates under Data region.
6.
In the Licenses panel, observe and note the Longitude range
coordinates under Data region.
7.
Click Cancel to complete the operation and return to the Display.
Figure 143
Determining Your Licensed Data Region
All licensed options are displayed in the Licenses panel. Unlicensed
options do not display in the panel.
Understanding the License File
Licensed TWX300 options are displayed in the General Configuration
dialog box, Others tab, Licenses panel.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 253
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
The License file has a default extension of .ini, and is located at
(Windows 7 may have a different path):
C:\Program Files\Vaisala\TWX300\license.
The License file maintains and defines:
- The coordinates of your authorized data region (data limits) for your
subscription.
Licensed TWX300 options allow you to:
- Provide ASCII output
- Use the Automatic Image Save function (when enabled)
- View Density data (when enabled)
- Attach a RADS to the system
- Attach a Relays box the system
- Attach 1 to 7 EFMs to the system
- Use email notification
Viewing Your Licensed Options
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select Tools > Configuration.
The Enter Password dialog box displays.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The General Configuration dialog box
displays.
4.
Click the General tab.
5.
The Licenses panel displays enabled/licensed options.
Note the illustration in Figure 143 on page 253, lists the
following licensed options:
- Density data
- Automatic image save
- RADS
- Relays
- EFMs
- ASCII out
254 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 12 _______________________________________________ TWX300 System Configuration
Using Password Protection
Some TWX300 functions are protected from alteration by using
password-protection. Configuration of the Display cannot be altered
without first being granted permission to do so by TWX300. Turning
off the Display, changing Configuration files or hardware schemes by
accident, is not possible with password-protected functions. The Enter
Password dialog box displays whenever a protected function is
accessed.
Figure 144
Entering a Password
Entering the correct password in the Password dialog box, permits the
user to:
- Protect Configuration files
- Change Configuration files
- Modify Warning Areas
- Access other protected functions
Password-Protected Functions
The system requires you to provide a password when changing any of
the configuration information listed below:
- Configuration
- Load Configuration
- Save Configuration
- Save Configuration As
- General Configuration
- Changing passwords
- Alarm configuration
- Connections
- Modifying Warning Areas
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 255
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
- Quitting the application
Entering a Password
The Enter Password dialog box automatically displays whenever a
protected function is being accessed.
1.
With the Enter Password dialog box displayed, enter your
password in the text box.
2.
Click OK to proceed.
Changing the Password
NOTE
1.
From the TWX300 menu, select Tools > Configuration. The
Password dialog box displays. See Figure 144 on page 255.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The General Configuration dialog box
displays.
4.
Click the General tab.
5.
Click Change Password. The Enter Old Password dialog box
displays.
6.
Enter the old password in the text box.
7.
Click OK to proceed. The Enter New Password dialog box
displays.
8.
Enter the new password in the text box.
9.
Click OK to proceed. The Reenter New Password dialog box
displays.
10.
Reenter the new password in the text box.
11.
When the message displays confirming the password change,
click OK to accept the change.
Using a "blank", or no password, for the New Password, removes all
password pop-ups until a new non-blank password is entered.
256 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 12 _______________________________________________ TWX300 System Configuration
Understanding System Messages and Bulletins
Locating System Bulletins
Bulletins have a default extension of .pws, and are archived at
(Windows 7 may have a different path):
C:\Program
Files\Vaisala\TWX300\TWX300_archive\BULLETINS.
Viewing System Bulletins and
Messages
You may sometimes receive a bulletin from Central. The incoming
message is displayed over the TWX300 Display, and is then archived
automatically.
- Close the Bulletin message using the Windows Close button.
- You can view bulletins at a later date by locating the file and
double-clicking it. The file can be displayed using Notepad, or other
configured text editor.
- When a message displays, the date displays in the Bulletin title bar
(yyyy:mm:dd), while the time is displayed within the file text
(hh:mm:ss:ms).
Figure 145
Viewing System Messages and Bulletins
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 257
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Understanding TWX300 Display Modes
TWX300 uses two modes to display lightning data. The two modes
are:
- Discharges mode
- Density mode
The Legend dialog box, Histogram and Information windows adopt
and display information types based on the Display mode selected
from the Display Mode buttons.
Discharges Mode
In Discharges mode lightning data are divided in two categories; IC
(Intra-Cloud) and CG (Cloud-to-Ground). Refer to Figure 146 below.
- IC lightning data is defined mainly by its position (latitude and
longitude) and associated time of occurrence (time resolution in 0.1
ms). IC discharges can be composed of one (displayed over the
Area Map as single dots) or more IC strokes (displayed over the
Area Map as broken lines).
- CG lightning data is defined mainly by its position, time of
occurrence, and associated electrical parameters (rise time, decay
time, current, etc.). CG discharges can be composed of one (return
stroke) or several CG strokes (return stroke followed by subsequent
strokes).
258 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 12 _______________________________________________ TWX300 System Configuration
Figure 146
TWX300—Discharges Mode
Density Mode
In Density mode, the TWX300 Display software calculates, in realtime, the number of discharges per square kilometer, per minute. Refer
to Figure 147 below.
TWX300:
- Calculates a matrix number of lightning per square kilometer every
xx minutes [refresh period].
- Sums matrixes during xx minutes [calculation period].
- Displays the cumulative matrix (resolution of displayed matrix can
be greater or equal to 1 sq. km).
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 259
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Figure 147
TWX300—Density Mode
Selecting a Display Mode
Refer to Table 41 on page 260 for detail.
- In the TWX300 toolbar, select one of two Display modes from the
Display Mode buttons.
- In the TWX300 Main menu, select one of the two display modes
from the menu View > Display.
Table 41
Button
Accessing TWX300 Display Modes
Function
Select to enter Discharges mode.
260 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 12 _______________________________________________ TWX300 System Configuration
Table 41
Button
Accessing TWX300 Display Modes
Function
Select to enter Density mode.
The Legend dialog box, Histogram and Information windows adopt and
display information types based on the Display mode selected from the
Display Mode buttons.
Understanding TWX300 Time—UTC
Time and Discharges
Time in almost all meteorological and hydro meteorological products
is expressed in a standard known as Coordinated Universal Time
(UTC); formerly known as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) or Zulu
Time. Midnight (0000 UTC) starts the 24 hour clock at the zero
meridian. Lightning data is located, received, displayed, and archived
in the UTC time format.
PC time is usually indicated on the Display as local time. You should
change current PC time to reflect the Universal Time Coordinated
(UTC) format as soon as possible because local time differs from UTC
by the number of hours of your time zone.
Discharges are saved using the time stamp given by the sensor, EFM
data are saved using the PC clock time adjusted to UTC.
PC Clock Adjustment
Because file selection is made easier when your PC clock is set to UTC
time, it is recommended that you set UTC on your PC as soon as
possible by selecting Casablanca, Monrovia for the time zone (Start >
Settings > Control Panel). Refer to your operating system
documentation for instructions on doing so.
NOTE
Casablanca, Monrovia is the preferred selection because the selection
has an unchanging zero (0) offset like that of GMT.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 261
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
NOTE
NOTE
It may be easier for you to determine time if your PC clock is set to the
24-hour format (military). Refer to your operating system
documentation for instructions on doing so.
The archiving time stamp is only as good as the PC clock and may
cause replay errors, especially if the PC time is reset during lightning
activity. It is strongly advised that you adjust the PC clock during
times of inactivity.
For more information on clock synchronization behavior, refer to the
ReadMe.txt file on the TWX300 Installation CD.
Inconsistent Event Dates
If an incoming event is time-stamped with a time that is one-minute
ahead of the PC clock you will receive an error message such as the
one displayed in the Information window in Figure 148 below.
Figure 148
Inconsistent Event Date Message
Using TWX300 System Fonts
The system is capable of displaying event symbols (system fonts) in
one of four forms using the Next Font command.
1.
In the TWX300 Main menu, select View > Next Font.
2.
Select one of the following font types:
262 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 12 _______________________________________________ TWX300 System Configuration
- Hollow
- Solid
- Enclosed
- Dots (points)
With each consecutive selection of this command, the Display cycles
through one of four preset fonts (symbols): solid, hollow, and enclosed
event symbols. See Table 42 below for examples; Dots are not
illustrated below as they simply appear as dots over the Area Map.
Table 42
Hollow
TWX300 System Font Symbols
Solid
Enclosed
Using Proportional Fonts
The system is capable of displaying proportional fonts (event symbols)
whose display size is proportional to the strength of the lightning
event.
See Figure 149 on page 264 for an illustration of regular font symbols
and see Figure 150 on page 265 for an example of how the displayed
symbol is sized relative to the event intensity.
To enable Proportional Fonts on the system:
- In the TWX300 toolbar, click
, the fonts (event symbols) will
display with the symbol size relative to event strength.
To disable Proportional fonts:
- Click
again to disable fonts.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 263
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Configuring Proportional Fonts
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select Tools > Configuration.
The General Configuration dialog box displays.
2.
Click the Others tab.
3.
In the Miscellaneous panel, Proportional Font Intensity Max
text box, enter a value (80 kA is the default).
The smaller the value, the larger the proportional symbol effect
becomes. The category is divided up into five font sizes, with max
representing the largest font size. If 80 kA is entered in the text box, the
smallest font represents lightning data in the 0-20kA range; then the
next larger font size is used for 20-40kA range, then the next larger
font size is used for 40-60kA range, and so on for the 60-80kA range;
while the maximum font size is used for the >80kA data range.
Figure 149
TWX300 Proportional Fonts
264 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 12 _______________________________________________ TWX300 System Configuration
Fonts Off
Fonts On
Figure 150
Proportional Fonts Displayed Over Map Area
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 265
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Understanding TWX300 System Files
System Archives
You can view archived files by using either the Replay function, where
lightning data is replayed over the Area Map, or by using the Data
Viewer to view the data in ASCII format.
- The first time the TWX300 application is run, an archive structure is
created in the same directory as the TWX300 executable file.
- The location of the Archive file is:
You
can select a new file location in the General Configuration dialog
box, General tab.
WINDOWS_APPDATA_DIR\VAISALA\TWX300\TWX300_archive\
Example: If you have three EFMs and one sensor in your system,
the EFM folders are named EFM1, EFM2, and EFM3, while the
sensor folder is named CEN.
NOTE
WINDOWS_APPDATA_DIR refers to C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Application Data in Windows XP and refers to C:\ProgramData
in Windows Vista or 7.
- The system automatically archives all user data, including bad data,
and Alarm incidents.
- All archived data is time-stamped with the current PC time in UTC;
or the time-stamp of when the data is received.
- TWX300 automatically deletes the oldest data if the Limit number
of archive files option is checked in the General Configuration
dialog box, General tab. Therefore it is recommended that you back
up needed files.
- Alarm information Log files are saved on a daily basis; therefore,
under normal conditions there is one Log file maintained per day.
- The number of days that files are maintained is user configured.
- Replay functions permit the replay of archived lightning data.
266 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 12 _______________________________________________ TWX300 System Configuration
- For Central and Density data, the system saves an archive file for
each day. You enter the number of maximum days you want saved
in the Number of days kept in Archive text box.
NOTE
Before the TWX300 application opens, it reads all archived files.
Because archived files can be quite large, it may sometimes take
awhile for the application to start.
Alarm Archive
TWX300 builds and maintains a daily ALARM archive file. The file is
a record of the Alarm state; including indicators of when Warning
Areas go into an Alert state and when they clear. If either the Warning
Area Alarm is acknowledged (to disable or mute the alarm), the action
is recorded.
Central Archive—(CEN)
- Central data is archived in a unique TWX300 and LTS2005 binary
file format (Secondary data type 4); common to SAFIR, Type 96
and Type 97 data.
- For Central data, each report in your subscribed region is recorded;
any reports originating from outside the subscribed region are
discarded.
Density Archive
Density data is archived in a unique format common only to TWX300
and LTS2005.
NOTE
Bad data (data that does not parse or checksum correctly) from an
EFM is recorded and marked with a Bad Data flag. The flag instructs
the Replay tool to ignore the data during replay.
NOTE
Currently, there is no method to determine if the coordinates or report
time are incorrect, except in the case when a stroke is received with a
time that is later than the current time.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 267
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
NOTE
A customized media player is included in the TWX300 Installation
CD. After installing the player, you can step through .avi files frame
by frame, forward and backward.
EFM Archive—(EFMx)
EFM data is time stamped and archived. For electric field intensity
reports, the median and high values are always archived. EFM values
are signed integers in volts per meter (V/m).
- Bad data is time stamped and saved in its binary format as it was
received. If the Data Viewer is used to view the bad data, the data is
displayed in an ASCII-HEX format.
- Data is divided up on a per second basis.
Locating and Viewing Archived
ALARM Text Files
A separate executable is delivered to view ALARM files on a time line
graphical format (see Alarm File Viewer).
Archived ALARM files can also be viewed using Notepad or your
configured text editor. See Figure 151 below.
1.
Using Windows Explorer, locate the ALARM archive directory.
The default location for archived files is
WINDOWS_APPDATA_DIR\VAISALA\TWX300\
TWX300_archive\ALARM.
2.
Click the ALARM folder to display all the files in the folder.
3.
Double-click on the file you want to display. The file displays.
4.
When finished reviewing the data, click the Windows Close
button to close the file, and return to Explorer.
268 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 12 _______________________________________________ TWX300 System Configuration
Figure 151
ALARM Text File Sample
Table 43 below describes ALARM text file fields.
Table 43
Field
A
B
C
D
E
ALARM Text File—Fields
Purpose
ALARM filename (yyyy:mm:dd:hhhh)
Time (hh:mm:ss:1/100sec.)
Warning Area (configured name)
Warning Area identification number
Message
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 269
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Locating and Viewing TWX300 Log
Files
Log files, as illustrated in Figure 152 below, assist in troubleshooting
problems with your TWX300 application, should they arise. The files
generally do not need to be saved for longer than one week if you are
experiencing no problems. Delete the files as needed, and at your
discretion.
Figure 152
Sample .log File
The Log file has a default extension of .log, and is located at:
WINDOWS_APPDATA_DIR\VAISALA\TWX300\log.
- Double-clicking on a file displays the contents of the file in
Windows Notepad (or the default configured text reader for your
system).
Locating and Viewing TWX300
Archive Files
For each data source, and for ALARM files, TWX300 retains an
Archive data folder created during the installation process.
The default location of Archive files is
WINDOWS_APPDATA_DIR\VAISALA\TWX300\TWX300_archive\<datas
ource> folder; where <datasource> is the configured data source
name.
Default folders are retained for the following:
- ALARM—Contains archived ALARM files.
270 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 12 _______________________________________________ TWX300 System Configuration
- BULLETINS—Contains archived Bulletin files (created after
receiving your first Bulletin).
- CEN—Contains archived Lightning data files
- DENS—Contains archived Density data files
- EFMn—Contains archived EFMn data (where n is the EFM
number or ID from 1 to 7)
Default Archive folders are located at:
- WINDOWS_APPDATA_DIR\VAISALA\TWX300\TWX300_archive\ALARM
- WINDOWS_APPDATA_DIR\VAISALA\TWX300\TWX300_archive\BULLE
TINS
- WINDOWS_APPDATA_DIR\VAISALA\TWX300\TWX300_archive\CEN
- WINDOWS_APPDATA_DIR\VAISALA\TWX300\TWX300_archive\DENS
- WINDOWS_APPDATA_DIR\VAISALA\TWX300\TWX300_archive\EFMn
NOTE
WINDOWS_APPDATA_DIR refers to C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Application Data in Windows XP and refers to C:\ProgramData
in Windows Vista or 7.
NOTE
The default location for archived files can be changed in the General
Configuration dialog box, General tab, Archive panel, Archive path text
box.
For more information on Archive backup, refer to the ReadMe.txt file
on the TWX300 Installation CD.
Backing Up Files
Locating Backup Directories
For each data source, and for ALARM files, TWX300 retains a
Backup data folder created during the installation process. Files must
be manually backed up. Refer to Backing Up Lightning Data Files on
page 272.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 271
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
- The default location of Backup files is
WINDOWS_APPDATA_DIR\VAISALA\TWX300\
TWX300_backup\<datasource> folder; where
<datasource> is the
configured data source name.
Default folders are retained for the following:
- ALARM—Contains backed-up ALARM files.
- BULLETINS—Contains backed-up Bulletin files.
- CEN—Contains backed-up Central files.
- DENS—Contains backed-up Density files.
- EFMn—Contains backed-up EFM files
Default Backup folders are located at:
- WINDOWS_APPDATA_DIR\VAISALA\TWX300\TWX300_backup\ALARM
- WINDOWS_APPDATA_DIR\VAISALA\TWX300\
TWX300_backup\BULLETINS
- WINDOWS_APPDATA_DIR\VAISALA\TWX300\TWX300_backup\CEN
- WINDOWS_APPDATA_DIR\VAISALA\TWX300\TWX300_backup\DENS
- WINDOWS_APPDATA_DIR\VAISALA\TWX300\TWX300_backup\EFMn
NOTE
The default location for archived files can be changed in the General
Configuration dialog box, General tab, Archive panel, Backup path
text box.
Backing Up Lightning Data Files
To preserve (backup) data files you must manually copy them, using
standard Windows functions, to a backup folder.
Default Backup folders are located at:
- WINDOWS_APPDATA_DIR\VAISALA\TWX300\TWX300_backup\ALARM
- WINDOWS_APPDATA_DIR\VAISALA\TWX300\TWX300_backup\BULLET
INS
- WINDOWS_APPDATA_DIR\VAISALA\TWX300\TWX300_backup\CEN
- WINDOWS_APPDATA_DIR\VAISALA\TWX300\TWX300_backup\DENS
- WINDOWS_APPDATA_DIR\VAISALA\TWX300\TWX300_backup\EFMn
272 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 12 _______________________________________________ TWX300 System Configuration
NOTE
The default location for archived files can be changed in the General
Configuration dialog box, General tab, Archive panel, Backup path
text box.
Understanding Configuration Files
One password-protected Configuration file, along with a License file,
is created by Vaisala and is specific to your subscribed area. To view
information contained in these files, use the TWX300 General
Configuration dialog box.
TWX300 permits you to make changes to the Display Configuration
file and save the file without overwriting the current Configuration file,
or rename then save the file. Multiple Configuration files may be
created for varying regions and conditions.
Locating Configuration Files
The Display Configuration file has a default extension of .cnfg, and is
located at: WINDOWS_APPDATA_DIR\VAISALA\TWX300\config.
File Parameters
The following parameters are defined by the Display
Configuration file:
- Central connection
- Archive (path and days)
- Map properties
- Clear Warning Area style
- In Alert Warning Area style
- Display data (colors, mode, lightning type(s) displayed)
- Alert settings
- Warning Area Alert settings
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 273
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
- Warning Area parameters
- EFM Alert settings
- EFM parameters
- Equations for RADS, relays and email notifications
- RADS parameters
- Relays parameters
- Email notification(s) parameters
- Predefined zooms (names, Auto-Cycle order, cycle display time)
- Density Calculation Area
- Mesh properties
- Calculation Time
- Number of Refresh periods
- Parameters for items listed in the General Configuration >
Identify tab
- Parameters for items listed in the General Configuration > Others
tab
- Parameters for items listed in the General Configuration >
General tab
Configuration File—Maintained
Parameter Items
This section lists what type of information is maintained in the
Configuration file for each item listed.
Central Connection Parameters
- Central data type-LP Type 96, LP Type 97, Secondary
- NLDN address
- Central Host IP number
- Central Port number
Archive Parameters
- Archive path
274 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 12 _______________________________________________ TWX300 System Configuration
- Number of days worth of files, kept in the Archive
Map Parameters
- Geoset
- Map unit
- Coordinate system
- Map datum
- Map type
- Latitude of origin
- Longitude of origin
"Clear" Warning Area Style Parameters
- Color
- Pattern
- Transparent (T or F)
- Border style (use solid lines)
- Border color
- Border width
"In Alert" Warning Area Style Parameters
- Color
- Pattern
- Transparent (T or F)
- Border style (use solid lines)
- Border color
- Border width
Display Data Parameters
- Color array
- Single color mode
- Legend Time-Period length
- Type of lightning data displayed (IC, CG+, or CG-)
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 275
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Warning Area Alert Parameters
- Warning Area name
- Warning Area Alert duration (in seconds)
- Warning Area enabled (T or F)
- Warning Area beep on Alert (T or F)
- Warning Area type (circle or polygon)
- Warning Area visible (T or F)
- Warning Area sound enabled
- Warning Area Alert sound
- Warning Area Clear sound
Warning Area Parameters
For each Warning Area:
- Warning Area name
- Warning Area type (circle or polygon)
- Warning Area radius if circle
- Warning Area points if polygon
- IC lightning data enabled (T of F)
EFM Alert Parameters
- EFM name
- EFM Alert threshold
- EFM Alert duration
- EFM enabled
- EFM beep on alert
- EFM sound enabled
- EFM Alert sound
- EFM Clear sound
Predefined Zoom Parameters
- Zoom name
276 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 12 _______________________________________________ TWX300 System Configuration
- Zoom latitude range
- Zoom longitude range
- Auto-Cycle display time
- Order for Auto-Cycle zooms
Additional Parameters
Along with the above-mentioned parameters, additional items are
maintained as well. All information entered in the following tabs of the
General Configuration dialog box are maintained in the Configuration
file as well.
- General Tab Parameters—Refer to Using the General Tab on page
84.
- Connections Tab Parameters—Refer to Using the Connections Tab
on page 87.
- Density Tab Parameters—Refer to Using the Density Tab on page
91.
- Identify Tab Parameters—Refer to Using the Identify Tab on page
94.
- Others Tab Parameters—Refer to Using the Others Tab on page 96.
Using Multiple Configuration Files
TWX300 permits you to make changes to the Display Configuration
file and save the file without overwriting the current Configuration file,
or rename then save the file. Multiple Configuration files may be
created for varying regions and conditions.
NOTE
When making changes to a Configuration file it is recommended that
you first save and rename a copy of the file you are working on; then
proceed to make changes on the copy.
TWX300 allows multiple user-defined Configuration files. In the case
where the file has been erased or is corrupted, default values are used
and Untitled is displayed in the Configuration Filename parameter.
Default information is then used by the TWX300 application.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 277
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Determining the Current Configuration File
Method One
The current Configuration filename is displayed in the title bar of the
TWX300 application. See Figure 153 below for detail.
Figure 153
Determining the Current Configuration File
Method Two
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select Tools > Configuration.
The Password dialog box displays.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The General Configuration dialog box
displays.
4.
Click the General tab.
5.
The Configuration filename and path (Windows 7 may have a
different path) being used is displayed in the Configuration
Filename text box. See Figure 154 below for detail
Figure 154
Configuration Filename Text Box
Saving a Configuration File
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select File > Save
Configuration As (use this command to rename a file). The
Enter Password dialog box displays.
Or:
From the Main menu select the File > Save Configuration menu
item (use this command to save a file without renaming it).
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The Save Configuration As dialog box
displays.
278 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 12 _______________________________________________ TWX300 System Configuration
4.
Enter a filename and location for the file. You can now save the
file for later use.
Loading a Saved Configuration File
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select File > Load
Configuration. The Password dialog box displays.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The Open Configuration dialog box
displays.
4.
Using the appropriate path
(WINDOWS_APPDATA_DIR\VAISALA\TWX300\config), or by
selecting Configuration files from the Files of type drop-down
list box, select a new Configuration file from the list box. The
name displays in the File name text box.
5.
Click Open. The Load Configuration message indicates the
progress of loading the new file.
The new Configuration filename displays on the title bar of the
TWX300 application, as well as in the General Configuration
dialog box.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 279
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
This page intentionally left blank.
280 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 13 ___________________________________________________TWX300 Communications
CHAPTER 13
TWX300 COMMUNICATIONS
TWX300 Data Exchange
TWX300 is configured to gather Central data from the LS8000, the
National Lightning Detection Network® (U.S. NLDN), an LP, CP and
TLP series central processor, and up to seven electric field mills
(EFMs).
This section discusses connection and configuration procedures for
receiving lightning and Alarm data used by the TWX300 system.
Central Data
At startup (system boot), TWX300 seeks and uses configuration file
information. The program then connects to the Central Data stream and
the EFMs. If the system is unable to connect to Central, the Status bar
turns red in color. Indicators along the bottom right-most portion of the
Status bar show the communications status with Central.
As TWX300 receives data, it first determines if the data message is
complete. If the message is complete, TWX300 then:
- Parses the message according to its type (Type 96, Type 97 or
SAFIR 3.1),
- Checks event coordinates to determine if the data obtained is from a
licensed area,
- Translates the data into a unique TWX300 format,
- Places the data in a buffer, then
- Archives the data.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 281
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
EFM Data
If any configured EFMs are unable to connect, a message displays in
the selected EFMs dialog box. The message does not prevent the
program from running. The bottom right-most portion of the Status bar
shows the communications status with an EFM.
As received, the EFM binary data is:
- Converted to volts per meter (V/m),
- Placed in a buffer, then
- Archived
Data Out
TWX300 lets you send data out (EFM commands) via TCP/IP as well
as receive it. An option in the EFM Status window provides the means
to select an EFM Commands dialog box.
Connection Configuration
Central Data Connection
1.
Before proceeding, obtain the following information:
- Central data type used (LP Type 96, LP Type 97, Secondary)
- Primary source Host IP number
- Primary source Port number
- NLDN address
2.
With the General Configuration dialog box displayed, click the
Connections tab.
3.
In the Central panel (Figure 155 below), select the Data type
your system is using from the following:
- LP Type 96
- LP Type 97
- Secondary
282 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 13 ___________________________________________________TWX300 Communications
Figure 155
4.
Selecting a Data Type
In the Primary source panel, enter the IP address of the data
source in the Host text box.
The source IP Port may be a Vaisala Central Analyzer, the VLDS
Server provided in the TWX300 Installation disk, or a PuTTy
connection.
5.
In the Port text box, enter the port number used by the data
source.
6.
In the NLDN address text box, enter the NLDN (National
Lightning Detection Network) address provided by Vaisala.
7.
Click Save & Exit to save the changes and exit the dialog box.
Click Save to save the changes, and leave the dialog box
displayed.
EFM Connection
NOTE
This procedure assumes that you have already properly installed and
configured any electric field mills (EFMs) used in the system.
1.
With the General Configuration dialog box displayed, click the
Connections tab.
2.
In the EFMs panel, select an EFM from the EFMs list box. See
Figure 156 below.
3.
In the Name text box, enter the name you want to use for the
selected EFM.
4.
Select the Enabled check box to enable the selected EFM to
receive and transmit electric field data.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 283
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
5.
In the Host text box, enter the IP address of the Host.
6.
In the Port text box, enter the port number for the selected EFM.
7.
In the Enhancement factor text box, enter a value from 1.0 to
9.99 for the enhancement factor for the selected EFM.
Figure 156
8.
Configuring an EFM Connection
In the EFM filtering mode panel, select the filtering mode for
the selected EFM.
Select the Highest values option to use the absolute highest
value recorded in one-second as the filter.
Select the option Median values to use the median value
recorded in one-second as the filter.
9.
Click Save & Exit to save the changes and exit the dialog box.
Click Save to save the changes, and leave the dialog box
displayed.
NOTE
Refer to your EFM II User's Guide for information on EFM
enhancement factors.
RADS Connection
1.
With the General Configuration dialog box displayed, click the
Connections tab.
2.
In the RADS panel, enter the Host IP number for the RADS. See
Figure 157 below.
284 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 13 ___________________________________________________TWX300 Communications
3.
In the Port text box, enter the port number used by RADS.
Figure 157
Configuring the RADS Connection
4.
Continue with configuring the Relays connection, or
5.
Click Save & Exit to save the changes and exit the dialog box.
Click Save to save the changes, and leave the dialog box
displayed.
If the Server option is selected, TWX300 uses the configured
RADS port (Port field) as a listening port on the local machine.
The RADS terminal server must then be configured as a client on
the computer running TWX300, on the configured RADS port.
Multiple RADS over the network can be a client to the TWX300
using this method.
Relays Connection
1.
With the General Configuration dialog box displayed, click the
Connections tab.
2.
In the Relays panel, enter the Host IP number for the relays. See
Figure 158 below.
3.
In the Port text box, enter the port number used by the relays.
Figure 158
4.
Configuring the Relays Connection
Click Save & Exit to save the changes and exit the dialog box.
Click Save to save the changes, and leave the dialog box
displayed.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 285
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Email Notification Connection
Prior to defining Email notification for Warning Areas, the parameters
described below must be completed. SMTP Server configurations vary.
User name and passwords may not be required, check with your
System Administrator for proper configuration parameters for your
SMTP Server.
1.
With the General Configuration displayed, click the Others tab.
The Others tab displays.
2.
In the Email notification panel (Figure 159 below):
- Enter the IP address of the SMTP Host in the SMTP host text
box.
- Enter your unique username, in the Username text box.
- Enter a properly formatted ([email protected]) and valid
Email address in the Address text box.
- Enter the password in the Password text box.
- Click Save & Exit to save the file, close the dialog box, and
return to the Display.
Click Save to save the changes, and leave the dialog box
displayed.
Figure 159
Configuring Email Notification
286 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 13 ___________________________________________________TWX300 Communications
Determining Communications Status
TWX300 Communications status is displayed by the right-most
indicators on the TWX300 Status bar. Colors are used by the system to
indicate the status of the selected connection.
Table 44 below describes each of the indicators; while Table 45 below
describes color meaning.
Table 44
Communications Status Indicators
Item
Function
A
B
C
D
Central communications indicator
EFMs communications indicator
RADS communications indicator
Relays communications indicator
Table 44 above indicates that the all communications connections are
good.
Table 45
Determining Communications Status—Indicators
Indicator Color
Grey
Green
Red
Meaning
Not installed (configured)
Communications OK
Problem with connection
Status Detail
Place and hover the mouse pointer over a colored indicator. A popup
message gives detailed information about the selected connection.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 287
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Status Messages
Socket Connections
The following messages are displayed in the Status bar and are used for
all socket connections unless otherwise noted:
Not connected (this is set when a TCP client is created)
Disconnected
Connected to (TCP IP port number)
Connected to (TCP IP port number): No data received (only for Central)
Connected to (TCP IP port number): Bad data received (only for Central)
Unreliable
CONNECTION ABORTED
CONNECTION RESET
CONNECTION REFUSED
Host not found
Cryptic socket error messages that begin with WSAE
Enabled Devices
For enabled devices where no data is being received, status can display
three different messages.
Message
Meaning
Not connected Device enabled but there is no valid host address.
Disconnected
Device enabled, there is a valid host address, the port has
been disconnected by TWX300.
No data
received
Device enabled, there is a valid host address, the port has
been connected by TWX300, but no data has been received.
288 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 13 ___________________________________________________TWX300 Communications
Socket Connections
Connection
Message
Central
Acquisition Off (used if there is no Central–no host or port in
configuration)
EFMs
EFMx: No data received
RADS
Stop sending messages (used when messages have been
discontinued to the RADS)
Relays
TIMEOUT (used when communications with relays fail)
Enabled Devices
- If a connection is determined to be “bad,” a status message displays
in the EFM Status window title bar. The EFM indicator in the Status
bar also changes color.
- An EFM Status window displays if a data disconnect occurs. See
Figure 160 below.
Figure 160
Bad EFM Connections
Notice the blue title bar and the red across the EFM Status window.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 289
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Configuring Email Notification
Adding an Address to the
Notification List
Each notification on a list is linked to an equation.
1.
With the Alarms dialog box displayed, click the Email
equations tab. The Email equations tab displays. See Figure 161
below.
Figure 161
2.
In the Email notification list panel, click the Add button. The
Input dialog box displays.
Figure 162
3.
Email Equations Tab
Input Dialog Box
Enter a notification title in the blank text field.
290 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 13 ___________________________________________________TWX300 Communications
4.
Click OK. The E-mail configuration dialog box displays. See
Figure 163 below.
Figure 163
Defining an Email Notification List
5.
Enter a properly formatted email address in the text box above
the Add button as illustrated below.
6.
When completely entered click Add. The address displays in the
E-mail addresses text area.
7.
Select the Alert cleared option to send a notification on when an
Alert is Clear.
8.
Select the Enabled option to enable notification to the address.
You may also select or deselect the Enabled option for a selected
email address at a later date.
9.
Select the Time ranges enabled option to only allow
notification only during defined time periods. See Defining Time
Notification Periods on page 292.
10.
In the Additional information text area, enter any additional
information you want sent with the notification.
11.
Click OK. The Create equation dialog box displays.
12.
Create a logical expression to be used when sending email
notification to the email address. Refer to Creating and Testing
Logical Expressions on page 317 for details.
13.
Click OK. The Alarms dialog box displays.
The address now displays in the E-mail address text area of the
E-mail configuration dialog box and the Alarms dialog box
Email notification list panel pull down.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 291
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
14.
Click Save and Exit to save the configuration, close the dialog
box, and return to the Display.
Defining Time Notification Periods
When the Time ranges enabled option is selected for an address,
email notification to the selected address occurs only during the
defined time periods.
Figure 164
Defining Email Notification Time Ranges
In Figure 164 above, email notification is defined to be sent (once the
equation is met and causes a trigger) every day of the week but Sunday.
With the exception of Saturday, the time periods for notification are
defined as midnight to midnight (24 hours) in Figure 164 above.
Notification is sent on Saturday if the trigger occurs between 6:00 am
and 6:00 pm. Note that all the times used in this example are in local
time and therefore, PC clock time.
You can define a time range that exceed the day selected by setting the
date like the example in Figure 165 below. In this example, email
notification is sent (once the equation is triggered) only if the event
occurs between 5:00 pm on Monday and 5:00 am on Tuesday.
Figure 165
Defining a Time Range
The UTC check box (Figure 166 below) provides the opportunity to
define time ranges using UTC time (pc clock time zone setting). Note
that an event that occurs on Monday in local time may not occur on
Monday in UTC time.
Figure 166
Selecting UTC Time
292 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 13 ___________________________________________________TWX300 Communications
To define a time range:
1.
With the Email configuration dialog box displayed, select an
email address.
2.
From the Time ranges panel, select a day of the week option for
notification.
3.
Select a beginning time from the between spin box.
4.
Select an ending time from the and spin box.
5.
Click OK to save the configuration, close the dialog box, and
return to the Display.
Removing an Email Address
1.
With the Email configuration dialog box displayed (Figure 167
on page 294), select the address you want removed from the
Email addresses list box.
2.
Click Remove. The address is removed from the list box.
3.
Click OK to save the configuration, close the dialog box, and
return to the Display.
Renaming an Email Address
1.
With the Email configuration dialog box displayed (Figure 167
on page 294), select the address you want to rename from the
Email addresses list box. The address displays in the text box
directly above the Add and Remove buttons.
2.
Enter the new address.
3.
Click Rename to change the selected address to the newlyentered address.
4.
Click OK to save the configuration, close the dialog box, and
return to the Display.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 293
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Testing an Email Address Used By the System
1.
With the Email configuration dialog box displayed (Figure 167
below), select the address you want to test from the Email
addresses list box.
The address displays in the text box directly above the Add and
Remove buttons.
2.
Click Test Address. The system sends a test message to the
recipient.
Figure 167
Testing an Email Address
The system displays a window informing you that a test message
has been sent. See Figure 168 below.
Figure 168
Sending a Test Message
A sample test message is shown in Figure 169 below.
294 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Chapter 13 ___________________________________________________TWX300 Communications
Figure 169
Sample Test Message
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 295
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
This page intentionally left blank.
296 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix A ______________________________________________________ Inspector Parameters
APPENDIX A
INSPECTOR PARAMETERS
The parameters displayed by Inspector are user-selectable in the
Identify tab, of the General Configuration dialog box. Note the value
or unit displayed for the selected item in the Unit text box. Refer to
Figure 170 below for detail.
Table 46 on page 298, below describes Identify parameters available to
you. Available parameters are dependant on the Data Type selected in
the Connections tab, General Configuration dialog box.
Figure 170
Identify Tab
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 297
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Table 46
Panel
Parameter
Inspector Dialog Box—Parameters
Parameter
available
when using
the
following
data feed
Comments
Unit of
Measure
(see NOTE
following
this table)
Intra cloud
Detection error
97 and
Secondary
Position 1
Secondary
Position 2
Secondary
Intra cloud node
Decimal second 97 and
Secondary
Altitude
Secondary
Altitude Error
Secondary
Secondary
Cell ID
(Not currently
used by
TWX300)
Source Power
Secondary
Cloud to ground
Detection error 96/97 and
Secondary
Decimal second 96/97 and
Secondary
Multiplicity
96/97 and
Secondary
Intensity
Intensity Error
Rise Time
96/97 and
Secondary
Secondary
Secondary
Decay Time
Secondary
Amplitude
Position 1
Position 2
Secondary
Secondary
Secondary
m
For 97: If 1 then the semi-major axis is
too long (>10km) or the Chi square is too
large (>7).
For Secondary: Position detection error.
Number of first sensor used for
localization.
Number of second sensor used for
localization.
Decimal portion of the second; or the
exact time the stroke occurred.
Altitude of the node
Altitude detection error
Reserved for future use. Cell number to
which this source belongs; as it is
derived from the cell tracking algorithm
(0 when not known).
Source power
ms
dBm
Same as IC
m
m
m
Same as IC node
Number of strokes in a flash.
Stroke multiplicity if flash data
Stroke data =0
For Secondary: All the strokes of a
flash are displayed and have a
multiplicity of 1.
Amperage value of the stroke
Error of intensity measurement
The time from when the lightning stroke
reaches the Enable threshold until the
time it reaches the peak.
The time from when a signal reaches its
Peak value, to when the signal
recrosses the Zero level.
Field strength
Same as IC
Same as IC
kA
kA
micro
second(s)
micro
second(s)
V/m
298 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix A ______________________________________________________ Inspector Parameters
Table 46
Panel
Parameter
Measurement
Cell ID
(Not currently
used by
TWX300)
Total lightning
Detection error
Decimal second
Str Number
Source Power
Chi Square
NOTE
Inspector Dialog Box—Parameters (Continued)
Parameter
available
when using
Comments
the
following
data feed
Secondary
Number of third sensor used for
localization. And station used for
measures.
Secondary
Same as IC node
Secondary
Secondary
Secondary
Secondary
Secondary
Relative Index
Secondary
Altitude
Altitude error
Sensor number
Cell ID
(Not currently
used by
TWX300)
Secondary
Secondary
Secondary
Secondary
Same as IC
Same as IC node
Flash ID for grouping algorithm
Same as IC
A statistical measurement of how much
deviation exists between sensor data in
calculating a lightning stroke location.
Relative index of the source to be
connected to as it comes from the flash
algorithm.
Same as IC node
Same as IC node
Sensor ID number
Same as IC node
Unit of
Measure
(see NOTE
following
this table)
ms
m
dBm
m
m
The indicated unit of measurement is considered and displayed as a
label. As such, the label may be customized (using the Label
properties dialog box), or you can change or rename the unit in the
Identify tab, Unit text box. However, it is recommended that where
appropriate you accept and use default values.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 299
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
This page intentionally left blank.
300 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix B _____________________________________________ Commonly Used Map Projections
APPENDIX B
COMMONLY USED MAP PROJECTIONS
A projection refers to a method of reducing the distortion that occurs
when objects from a spherical surface are displayed on a flat surface
(coordinate system). There are many different types of projections,
each designed to reduce the amount of distortion for a given area.
Many types of projections are used in mapping and information
gathering activities. The links below provide information on some of
the most commonly used map projections.
Examples of the following projections are included:
- Mercator Projection
- Regional Equal-Area projection
- UTM (WGS84) projection
- US State Plane projection
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 301
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Mercator Projection
This projection is suitable for a large area. The projection becomes
distorted near the poles and seems to be most useful between 45
degrees North latitude and 45 degrees South latitude; however, it will
still provide a usable map beyond those latitudes. If you need to view
an area that encompasses several countries or crosses continents, this
projection is a good one to use.
Figure 171
Mercator Projection of the World
302 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix B _____________________________________________ Commonly Used Map Projections
Regional Equal-Area Projections
This type of projection is a good choice for a local area the size of one
country or small continent. You must remember to select the
appropriate country/region or you will be viewing a distorted map.
These projections do not work well for large areas.
Refer to Figure 172 below for an example of a continent-sized area.
Figure 173 on page 304 provides an example of the distortion that
occurs if used over too large an area.
Figure 172
Regional Equal-Area India Projection
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 303
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Figure 173
Regional Equal-Area India Projection
304 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix B _____________________________________________ Commonly Used Map Projections
UTM (WGS84) Projection
This projection is popular and is suitable for areas smaller than a
continent. It begins to noticeably distort at coverages larger than 20 to
25 degrees longitude. You must know what zone number your view is
located in and select the Northern or Southern hemisphere. This
projection does not work well for large areas.
Refer to Figure 174 below, and Figure 175 on page 306 for an example
of a small area, and the type of distortion that occurs at the world level.
Figure 174
UTM (WGS84), Zone 13, Northern Hemisphere
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 305
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Figure 175
UTM (WGS84), Zone 13, Northern Hemisphere
Showing the Area Around 105 Degrees West
306 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix B _____________________________________________ Commonly Used Map Projections
US State Plane Projection
This projection/coordinate system is used for the United States only. It
works very well for small areas (including areas of up to one state in
size). It is important to note which zone within the state is being used
and the units of measure. Changing the zone within the state can make
a significant difference in the appearance of the map and change the
meaning of the coordinate values used for placing features. Refer to
Figure 176 below for detail.
This projection does not work well for large areas. Refer to Figure 177
on page 308 for an example of the distortion that occurs if used over
too large an area.
Figure 176
US State Plane Coordinate System (1983, meters),
Showing Oklahoma North Region
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 307
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Figure 177
US State Plane Coordinate System (1983, meters),
Showing The World
308 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix C _______________________________________________________________Data Aging
APPENDIX C
DATA AGING
Time-Period Length
As lightning is plotted on the Display, the TWX300 application assigns
the event a colored symbol. The symbol represents the discharge type
of the event, while the color indicates the relative age of the event.
TWX300 displays activity for cloud, and both positive and negative
cloud-to-ground lightning. As flashes accumulate, the Discharge Type
symbol changes color in accordance with the colors selected in the
Legend dialog box. See Figure 178 below and Figure 183 on page 314.
Figure 178
Aged Lightning Data—1
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 309
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Map Legend Color Keys
Refer to Understanding the Map Legend on page 103; and to Figure
179 below.
- The color key displayed for each time classification in the Legend
dialog box may be customized by the user.
- The color(s) used for aging displayed events is dependant upon the
time period selected in the Legend dialog box.
- The color keys in the Legend dialog box display the event in the
color selected to represent specific time periods of lightning activity
in the TWX300 Display.
- Events occurring within each time period are displayed in a unique
color.
- The colors selected in the Legend are used in the Histogram as well.
- Clicking
in the Center coordinate panel, changes the solid
colors used for the Display, to colors using a gradient (progressively
changing color).
- Clicking
in the Center coordinate panel, reverts the gradients to
solid colors.
- The time interval used in the Legend dialog box, is set in the Timeperiod length drop-down list box.
Figure 179
Map Legend—Color Keys
Using the incoming discharge time, TWX300 time-stamps each
incoming event (flash). Using the PC clock time, TWX300 timestamps all incoming EFM data. That flash time, in conjunction with the
310 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix C _______________________________________________________________Data Aging
color(s) and the Time-period length selected, determine how long the
flash is kept in a specific time period (color). When the age of the flash
exceeds the Time-period length selected in the Legend dialog box, the
flash ages and is displayed in a new color in accordance to the Timeperiod length selected.
Legend bins are updated every refresh period (a multiple of the time
period). Table 47 below indicates the different time period(s), their
associated refresh period and the minimum and maximum duration of
data displayed.
Table 47
Time Period
5 sec.
10 sec.
30 sec.
1 min.
2.5 min.
5 min.
10 min.
20 min.
30 min.
1 hr.
2 hrs.
4 hrs.
Data Aging—Time Period vs. Refresh Period
Refresh Period
5 sec.
10 sec.
30 sec.
30 sec.
30 sec.
1 min.
1 min.
5 min.
5 min.
10 min.
30 min.
1 hr.
Min. Duration
25 sec.
50 sec.
2 min., 30 sec.
5 min., 30 sec.
14 min., 30 sec.
29 min.
59 min.
1 hr., 55 min.
2 hrs., 55 min.
5 hrs., 50 min.
11 hrs., 30 min.
23 hrs.
Max. Duration
30 sec.
1 min.
3 min.
6 min.
15 min.
30 min.
1 hr.
2 hrs.
3 hrs.
6 hrs.
12 hrs.
24 hrs.
Figure 180 on page 312 illustrates the concept of Time-Period Length
and Refresh Period Length; while Figure 181 on page 313, illustrates
aged data as it is displayed by the system.
In Figure 180 below, the Time-Period Length selected is 10 minutes
and the Refresh Period value is set to 5 minutes. In the application, this
value is set to 1 minute. The three time lines illustrate how the system
color codes the data at a given time.
VAISALA _______________________________________________________________________311
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Figure 180
Data Aging—Time Lapse Example
312 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix C _______________________________________________________________Data Aging
Figure 181
Aged Lightning Data
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 313
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Setting a Time-Period Length for Data Aging
The time-period selected is used by the system to display lightning
data. See Figure 182 and Figure 183 below.
- With the map Legend displayed, select a time period using the
Time-period length drop-down list box. The Display automatically
updates.
Figure 182
Figure 183
Selecting a Time-Period Length
Aged Lightning Data—2
314 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix C _______________________________________________________________Data Aging
Interaction of Map Legend Colors and Replay
As events occur, they are aged on the Display from the oldest to the
newest event using colors defined in the Legend dialog box.
Data Aging
The Legend is divided into 6 time periods, each represented by a
unique color. The colors displayed in the Legend are used for the
display of lightning data over the Area Map and in the Histogram.
These colors indicate the age of the lightning displayed on the map.
Lightning is aged on the time-period boundary; meaning, if you are
using 5 minutes as the Time-period length, on every minute that is
divisible by 5, 10, 15, etc., the lightning is aged and the most recent
color will have no lightning. For a Time-period length of 2 hours, each
legend division starts on the hours 2, 4, 6, etc., or 1, 3, 5, etc.
Example: If you use a Legend Time-period length setting of 2 hours,
at most there is 12 hours worth of lightning data on the map. If the
current time is 15:00, the data displayed will have occurred between
03:00 and 15:00; the full 12 hours. However, if the current time is
14:55, the data displayed will have occurred between 03:00 and 14:55;
or 11 hours and 55 minutes. The 5 oldest colors will each have 2 hours
of lightning data, but the most recent color will only have 1 hour and
55 minutes of lightning.
Map Legend Colors and Replay
Replay uses the same color scheme defined in the Legend dialog box.
If you have a Legend Time-period length of 1 hour (with 10 minutes
refresh period) defined, and replay time selection is between 00:00 to
00:00 next day, the most recent 5 hours 50 minutes to 6 hours of event
data are displayed. Every 10 minutes the lightning will age; therefore,
if the current time is xx:x0, 6 hours of data are displayed. If the time is
xx:x1 only 5 hours and 50 minutes of lightning are displayed.
See Figure 184 below.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 315
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Figure 184
Map Legend Color Keys Versus Lightning Data
Aging
316 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix D ______________________________________ Creating and Testing Logical Expressions
APPENDIX D
CREATING AND TESTING LOGICAL
EXPRESSIONS
Creating Alarm Conditions
Alarm Requirements
- Lightning within one or more defined Warning Areas
- Electric field mills to monitor
- Electric field threshold values
Understanding Logical Expressions
Logical expressions are used to define Alarms conditions. When an
Alarm condition is met, a signal is sent to the RADS/Relay for display.
This is a brief explanation of logical expressions as they apply to
TWX300. More information regarding logical expressions and
Boolean Logic are available via the Internet.
TWX300 employs user-input from the Create Equation for <function
x> dialog box (Figure 185 on page 318) to set trigger conditions for
RADS, Relay functions and email notification.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 317
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Figure 185
Create Equation Dialog Box—Relay
Operators
If Warning Area and EFM data options are available, you can define
trigger conditions that associate those options using the Boolean logic
operators And and Or. When using the And operator, all associated
options must be true (occur) for the alarm to trigger. When using the Or
operator, at least one of the associated options must occur for the alarm
to trigger.
You can create equation sets using the different combinations of
Boolean operators. The operators used most often are AND and OR.
- The AND operation says if and only if all inputs are on, the output is
on. The output is off if any of the inputs are off.
- The OR operation says if any input is on, the output is on.
- The NOT operation excludes selected input.
Parenthesis
Parentheses maintain logic order. When creating an equation that uses
both AND and OR, we must instruct the PC which part of the equation
to execute first. Items contained within parenthesis ( ) are always
interpreted or executed first. If an equation contains a parenthesis
within a parenthesis (as in the illustration below), the innermost
parenthesis is executed first.
318 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix D ______________________________________ Creating and Testing Logical Expressions
Example: In the example above, the items in parenthesis (EFM1 or
EFM2) is executed before the expression WA3 and.
In the grouping WA2 or (WA3 and (EFM1 or EFM2)) the parenthesis
around the first logical set directs TWX300 to set a Red-Yellow Alert
based on either WA2 lightning data alone; or a combination of EFM1
or EFM2 electric field mill data and WA3 lightning data.
Creating Logical Expressions
The procedure described below is the same when creating Alarm
equations for both RADS and Relays.
- If you are creating an Alarm equation for RADS, display the Create
Equation for RADS dialog box.
- If you are creating an Alarm equation for Relays, display the Create
Equation for Relays dialog box.
Figure 186
Creating Logical Expressions
When creating logical expressions:
- Consider the data type(s) you want to base your equation(s) on.
- Do you want to include any, all, or none of the following items in
your Alarm equation:
- Warning Area data alone?
- EFM data alone?
- Combination of both Warning Area or EFM data?
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 319
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
- Do you want either Warning Area or EFM data considered
before another?
- Do you want to exclude either Warning Area or EFM data
from the equation?
- By making selections from the Warning Area and EFM list boxes,
create an Alarm Equation by selecting an AND or OR option to set
the appropriate logical association between the required lightning
events in a selected Warning Area and electric field values from
EFMs. The triggering criteria may be applied to none, any, all, or a
particular combination of Warning Areas and EFMs. Select NOT to
exclude data from the equation. Refer to the table at the end of this
procedure for button function descriptions.
When done, click Ok to accept the equation and close the dialog
box.
The buttons described in Table 48 below are used in both the Create
Equation for RADS and Create Equation for Relays dialog boxes, to
create logical expressions.
Table 48
Button
Logical Operators
Function for Warning Areas and EFMs
The logical AND operator requires selected components
both be in a state of Alert. Retrieve records in which both
of the search terms are present.
The logical OR operator collates the results to retrieve all
the unique records containing one term, the other, or
both.
The logical NOT operator excludes records from your
search results.
Begin parenthesis
End parenthesis
Click to undo the last step entered.
Click to erase the entire expression.
Click to select an item from either the Warning Area or
EFM list box to place appropriately in an equation.
NOTE
Beware of using redundant terms.
320 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix D ______________________________________ Creating and Testing Logical Expressions
Testing an Alarm Equation
The following items are tested:
- An Alarm Equation (logical expression)
- RADS light combinations (R, R-Y, Y, Y-G)
- Audible alarm
- A specific relay (1 through 8)
Test RADS and Relay Alarms
Function
The Alarms Output Test displays expected RADS and RELAYS
response according to the current Alarm equations, and exercises the
RADS and RELAYS themselves. The dialog box displays lists of
Warning Areas and EFMs. By selecting a Warning Area or EFM from
the appropriate list, the display at the top-right of the dialog indicates
the condition of the RADS and individual relays by mimicking the
RADS and relay responses in the dialog box.
The Test RADS and Relay Alarms dialog box (Figure 187 on page
322) provides a way to test the functionality of the RADS and Relays
alarm configuration. This allows you to test the response of the RADS
and Relays according to the current Alarm configuration.
Alerts During Testing
During testing, real-time operations are still being monitored. If a real
Alarm occurs, the test is aborted and a popup message to that effect
displays. The Display then returns to real-time mode.
NOTE
Testing cannot be accomplished while the Display is in any Alert
condition.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 321
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Displaying the Test RADS and Relays Dialog Box
- From the TWX300 Main menu, select Tools > Test RADS and
Relays. The Test RADS and Relay Alarms dialog box displays. See
Figure 187 below.
Figure 187
Test RADS and Relays Dialog Box
To test an Alarm Equation:
1.
Display the Alarms dialog box, RADS Equations tab.
Or the Relay Equations tab, depending on which you are
checking.
2.
Display the Test RADS and Relays dialog box.
3.
In the Test RADS and Relays dialog box, select an Alert
(Warning Area and/or EFM combination) from the appropriate
column(s), and observe the response (output) in the Test RADS
and Relay Alarms dialog box.
These responses should coincide with the logical expression
displayed in the Create Equation for < > dialog box. The
equation must produce the intended results.
4.
Compare the results in the Test RADS and Relays dialog box,
against the equation displayed in the Alarms dialog box.
Based on the Test RADS and Relay Alarms dialog box output,
determine if the logic used in the equation is producing the
output you are expecting. See Figure 188 below.
322 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix D ______________________________________ Creating and Testing Logical Expressions
Figure 188
Testing RADS and Relays
Based on Figure 188 above, the expected output for a red-yellow Alert
would occur if Warning Area 2, or if EFM1 or EFM3 went into Alert.
This would give us the expected red-yellow output, as shown in Figure
189 below.
Figure 189
Red-Yellow Alert
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 323
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Figure 190
Yellow-Green Alert
Based on Figure 190 above, the expected output for a yellow -green
Alert would occur if EFM1 or EFM2 in combination with Warning
Area3 went into an Alert. This would give us the expected yellowgreen output, as shown directly above.
324 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix E ________________________________________ Using the Vaisala Lightning Data Server
APPENDIX E
USING THE VAISALA LIGHTNING DATA
SERVER
ASCII Output
TWX300 has an ASCII output function which enables TWX300 to
output data, within a specified region, from a socket server port in
ASCII format. After TWX300 has been installed and data is being
received from Vaisala, and you have proper licensing, the ASCII
Output function can be enabled.
NOTE
You must be licensed to enable this feature.
Determining Your Licensed ASCII
Output Region
1.
From the TWX300 Main menu, select Tools > Configuration.
The Enter Password dialog box displays.
2.
Enter your password.
3.
Click OK to proceed. The General Configuration dialog box
displays.
4.
Click the General tab.
5.
In the Licenses panel, observe and note the Latitude range
coordinates under ASCII output region. See Figure 191 on page
326.
6.
In the Licenses panel, observe and note the Longitude range
coordinates under ASCII output region.
7.
Click Cancel to complete the operation and return to the Display.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 325
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Figure 191
NOTE
Panel Indicating the Licensed ASCII Output
Region
All enabled licensed options are displayed in the Licenses panel.
Configuring TWX300 for ASCII
Output
1.
Select the Tools > General Configuration Main menu item. The
General Configuration dialog box displays.
2.
Click the Others tab.
3.
In the ASCII Output panel, select the Enabled check box. See
Figure 192 below.
4.
In the Listening Port text box, enter the output port number (a
value >1024 is recommended).
5.
Using the Format drop-down list box, select the appropriate
format for your use.
6.
Click Save & Exit to save the file changes and return to the
Display.
Figure 192
NOTE
ASCII Output Panel
Run the netstat command in the Windows Run dialog box, to
determine what ports are already in use.
326 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix E ________________________________________ Using the Vaisala Lightning Data Server
Verifying ASCII Output
The ASCII region, once licensed, can be verified.
1.
Select the Tools > General Configuration Menu item. The
General Configuration dialog box displays.
2.
In the Licenses panel (Figure 193 below), observe and note the
information provided under the ASCII Output Region title.
Figure 193
Licenses Panel
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 327
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Using the Vaisala Data Server
The Vaisala Lightning Data Server (VLDS) window provides a standalone method of configuring and distributing a data feed to one or
many licensed copies of TWX300. The VLDS window also provides a
method of distributing an ASCII Output Data Stream (when licensed
for ASCII output) when needed. Refer to Figure 194 below for detail.
NOTE
ASCII Output is time stamped in GMT.
Displaying the VLDS Window
- From your Windows Desktop, click the
window displays. See Figure 194 below.
Figure 194
icon. The VLDS
Vaisala Lightning Data Server (VLDS)
Window—On and Off States
Table 49 below describes VLDS button functions.
Table 49
Button/Indicator
VLDS Button/Indicator Functions
Function
ON/OFF switch for VLDS. The number of active connections is displayed to the
right of the Data Server button.
Color red indicates OFF
Color green indicates ON
Color yellow indicates connection attempt, or a problem with the connection.
ON/OFF switch for ASCII Output from TWX300.
Color red indicates OFF
Color green indicates ON
Color yellow indicates connection attempt, or a problem with the connection.
Hover the mouse over the buttons to display detailed connection information.
328 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix E ________________________________________ Using the Vaisala Lightning Data Server
Displaying the VLDS Configuration
Dialog Box
- With the VLDS window displayed select File > Config.... The
Vaisala Lightning Data Server Configuration dialog box displays.
See Figure 195 below for detail.
You can now view the current configuration of the VLDS; or make
changes.
Figure 195
VLDS Configuration Dialog Box
Table 50 below describes VLDS dialog box keys. The keys are located
in the left-most column of the VLDS configuration dialog box. Not all
available keys are displayed in Figure 195 above
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 329
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Table 50
Key
LogActive
LogFile
InServerIP
InServerPort
ServerPort
LTSServerIP
LTSServerPort
OutRSComNumber
OutRSComSpeed
OutRSComParity
VLDS Key Descriptions
Value Description
[General]
Default=1. Defines if and how much .log information to place in the .log
file.
1=General information
0=None
2=Debug
Displays the .log path and filename used for placing VLDS .log files.
New entries must be contained within the quotes (' '). You must first
manually create the .log file using Notepad.
[Data Input]
Hostname or IP Address of the Central Data Server.
NLDN
Terminal Server connected to a satellite
PuTTy connection
CP
LP
Port that the Data Stream is placed on from the configured InServerIP
address.
[Socket Server Output]
Port that VLDS places the shared Data Stream (output).
[ASCII Output]
IP address of the TWX300 where the ASCII output is enabled.
The Port value on the ASCII generating PC that VLDS will get ASCII data
from, must match the Listening Port value entered in the Listening Port
text box, Others tab, General Configuration dialog box.
Com port for data output
Data output speed
Parity bit for Output data
330 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix E ________________________________________ Using the Vaisala Lightning Data Server
Displaying VLDS Version
Information
- With the VLDS window displayed, click Help > About. The About
window displays providing you with VLDS version information.
Click OK to close the window.
Figure 196
About VLDS Window
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 331
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
This page intentionally left blank.
332 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix F ____________________________________________ Introduction to Lightning Detection
APPENDIX F
INTRODUCTION TO LIGHTNING
DETECTION
Lightning Phenomena
The following discussion provides a basic introduction to lightning
phenomena and measurement technology.
Lightning is the rapid transfer of significant charge between two
regions kilometers apart. Lightning can occur as cloud discharges and
cloud-to-ground (CG) flashes. Of these, CG lightning has the greater
impact on our daily lives.
Anatomy of a CG Lightning Flash
A cloud-to-ground flash is typically composed of a sequence of
individual return strokes which transfer significant charge from the
cloud to ground, each stroke exhibiting peak currents in the range of a
few kiloamperes to 300 kiloamperes. These strokes each have a
nominal duration of 20 to 50 microseconds, and are typically separated
in time by 20 to 100 milliseconds. A flash is typically comprised of 2
to 4 strokes, but may contain as few as one and as many as fifteen or
more strokes. The number of strokes in a flash is frequently referred to
as the flash multiplicity. For many flashes, the subsequent strokes
(strokes which occur after the first stroke of a flash) contact the earth at
the same strike point as the first stroke because they travel through the
channel established by the first stroke. However, 30 to 50% of all
flashes contain strokes that produce different ground strike points,
separated by a few hundred meters to several kilometers or more. For
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 333
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
practical purposes, some researchers have defined a flash as the
ensemble of all cloud-to-ground strokes that strike within 10 km of
each other within a one second interval. For further information, see
Cummins, et al., 1998.
Radio Frequency Characteristics of
Lightning
Cloud discharges and cloud-to-ground (CG) flashes both emit radio
frequency (RF) energy over a wide range of frequencies. During the
processes that create new channels, there are strong emissions in the
VHF range. When high currents occur in previously established
channels (e.g., return strokes), the most powerful emissions occur in
the LF and VLF ranges. Figure 197 below1 illustrates the radiation
field pulse activity in the VLF, LF, MF, and VHF frequency ranges.
Figure 197
1
CG and Cloud Flashes at Various Frequency Ranges
Adapted from Malan (1963).
334 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix F ____________________________________________ Introduction to Lightning Detection
In the LF and VLF bands, the radiation fields from cloud-to-ground
strokes are strongest because of their channel length and large currents.
Consequently, there are only a few large pulses per flash. Cloud
discharges produce tens to hundreds of small pulses (~ 5% of the
median amplitude of return strokes) in the LF range, and occasionally
will produce pulses that are comparable in magnitude to return strokes.
By contrast, there are approximately 100 times as many pulses in the
VHF band as in the LF and VLF, and the amplitudes of the pulses
produced by cloud discharges are comparable to those of CG flashes.
VHF radiation is produced by breakdown processes that have
dimensions on the order of tens to hundreds of meters and relatively
small currents. Usually, relatively little VHF pulse activity is
associated with the high-current components of lightning such as the
return strokes.
Given the differences in the pulse rates and amplitudes at the different
frequencies, different techniques are better suited for detecting
different processes in cloud and CG flashes, as shown in Figure 198
below.
Figure 198
Relationship, Frequency and Lightning Detection
Method
The LF and VLF signals that propagate along the surface of the earth
have been used to detect and locate return strokes in CG flashes for
many years. Sensors that operate in the LF and VLF range can also be
used to detect and locate cloud flashes, although, as described above,
the signals are normally much smaller than those of return strokes. LF
and VLF sensor technology has been applied to the detection of CG
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 335
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
return strokes by detecting the VLF signal components that propagate
thousands of kilometers and reflect between the ionosphere and the
ground. This long-range propagation allows some CG lightning to be
detected in remote areas where sensors cannot be installed.
Sensors that operate in the VHF band are equally sensitive to most
processes in both cloud and CG flashes. Because of the line-of-sight
propagation of VHF signals, these sensor networks have a limited
range. However, the line-of-sight propagation, together with the fact
that VHF impulses are of short duration, allows VHF sources to be
modeled as point sources and located in three dimensions as described
in section VHF Detection on page 344. In addition, the large number of
pulses per flash in the VHF range means that the flash geometry can be
mapped in detail.
Uses of Lightning Data
Lightning is powerful. A lightning stroke can kill people, animals, and
trees, destroy equipment, start fires, and disturb or disable power
delivery systems. Real-time lightning data can be used to trace the
evolution and movement of storms. It can also be used to anticipate the
arrival of a thunderstorm and hence to help manage its destructive
potential.
The following are a few examples of groups that can benefit from
lightning data:
- Air traffic managers
- Weather monitoring and severe weather warning service providers
- People engaged in any outdoor activity, such as water sports,
playing golf, hiking, and using outdoor amusement rides where
lightning could pose a hazard
- Forest managers who need to predict fire-start potential
- Outdoor construction and maintenance workers who might be
exposed to lightning
- Refueling, munitions, and pyrotechnic workers where lightning
might cause premature ignition
- Power utility staff involved in lightning protection and repair crew
management
- Fault analysts that correlate events (such as power line faults) with
lightning strokes to determine if the event was lightning caused
336 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix F ____________________________________________ Introduction to Lightning Detection
- Utility planners for power line routing and lightning protection
systems
- Insurance companies verifying claims for lightning damage
LF/VLF Lightning Location Methods
The following discussion summarizes the methods used by Vaisala to
detect and locate lightning over large areas using signals in the LF and
VLF frequency ranges. These methods are used primarily for locating
CG flashes.
A Brief History
All existing methods for determining the position of individual cloudto-ground (CG) lightning strokes are based either on direction finding
or time-of-arrival methods, or a combination of these methods.
Early work in applying time-of-arrival for locating lightning was
published by Lewis et al. (1960) and Oetzel et al. (1969), although U.S.
patents on various implementations of hyperbolic methods for locating
lightning date back to the early 1950s. An advanced version of this
methodology is being used in current Vaisala systems.
Work in applying magnetic direction finding for locating lightning
dates back to the 1920s (Watson-Watt and Herd, 1926; see also,
Horner, 1957). In 1976, a more accurate magnetic direction finding
(DF) system was developed for locating CG lightning within a range of
about 500 km (Krider et al., 1976 and 1980). This system operated in
the time-domain (covering the LF and VLF bands from about 1 to
500 kHz and was designed to respond only to field waveforms that
were characteristic of the return strokes in CG flashes. When such a
field was detected, the magnetic direction was sampled at the time of
the initial field peak so that the direction vector pointed as closely as
possible to the onset of the stroke, to the place where the stroke struck
ground. The electric field was also sampled at this time to determine
the stroke polarity. When employed in a network of DFs, the location
of the stroke could be estimated from the measured components of the
peak field.
As with time-of-arrival, there are several U.S. patents on specific
methods for location by direction finding. Vaisala manufactures
systems that include this technology. The basic principles for these two
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 337
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
methods are discussed in the following sections, along with methods
which combine them.
Basic Direction Finding
Direction finding systems employ two or more sensors which measure
the azimuth (angle from true north) between the sensor and the
lightning stroke. The azimuth is typically determined through the use
of two orthogonal magnetic loop antennas. When three or more sensors
report a discharge, an optimization procedure which minimizes the
angle errors of the reporting sensors can be employed. Figure 199
below illustrates the outcome of this procedure. The three points (L12,
L13, and L23) show the possible locations that would be computed if
only two sensors were to report a discharge; each of the three location
points is referred to as a triangulation or intersection.
S2
S1
S3
Actual Stroke
Location
L12
Lij — Intersection of
Azimuths from Si and Sj
L23
Figure 199
L13
Optimal Estimate
Optimal Location Algorithm for Magnetic Direction
Finding
There are certain conditions where the geometrical relationship
between direction-finding sensors and the lightning discharge location
produce poor results. Specifically, if the discharge occurs along a line
between two sensors, and these sensors are the only ones to sense the
discharge, then errors in azimuth measurement can result in significant
errors in location. In some circumstances the measurements may not
produce an intersection at all. Because of this baseline problem,
practical networks employ at least three sensors.
338 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix F ____________________________________________ Introduction to Lightning Detection
Basic Time-of-Arrival
Time-of-arrival systems produced by Vaisala employ a two-step
iterative process using four or more sensors that measure the arrival
time of the lightning stroke. The onset (arrival time) of the signal at a
sensor is the sum of the time of occurrence of the lightning event
(onset of the return stroke for CG lightning) and the travel time from
the event location to the sensor location.
The first step is a hyperbolic intersection method in which each pair of
sensors yields a hyperbolic curve describing the set of possible
latitude/longitude locations (locus of points) which satisfy the
difference in arrival time (Si – Sj) between the sensors in the pair (see
Figure 200 below).
Possible Locations
S1 - S 2
S1
S 1 - S2
S1
Stroke
S2
S2
Stroke Position
S3
S 3 - S1
Figure 200
Hyperbolic Intersection
Given two such curves produced by three sensors, it is possible to
determine a position from the intersection of these curves, as shown in
Figure 200 above, as well as the time at which the discharge occurred.
However, under some geometrical conditions, curves produced from
only three sensors result in two intersections, leading to an ambiguous
location as shown in Figure 201 below; this problem is avoided if four
or more sensors detect the discharge.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 339
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
S1
S3
S2
True Position
False
Position
Figure 201
Ambiguous Location, 3-Sensor Hyperbolic
Intersection
The next step in the iterative lightning location algorithm employs a
circular intersection location method involving both the estimated
location and estimated time of the lightning discharge determined from
hyperbolic intersection. In this situation, the difference between the
estimated discharge time and the measured arrival time at each sensor
provides information which establishes a distance (range) of the
discharge from the sensor, thus producing a circular locus of possible
locations for each sensor (see Figure 202 on page 341). If only three
sensors detect lightning, the position and time of the discharge that
causes all the circles to intersect are identical to the initial estimates of
position and time given by hyperbolic intersections.
When more than three sensors report, the time-of-arrival algorithm can
produce an optimized solution (see Figure 203 on page 341). In
addition, the circular intersection method is readily generalized to
work in conjunction with angle measurements, as discussed in the next
section.
340 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix F ____________________________________________ Introduction to Lightning Detection
Stroke Position
S1
S2
Figure 202
S3
Circular Intersection Using Three Sensors
S2
S3
S1
S4
Stroke
Position
Figure 203
Circular Intersection Step Using Four Sensors
Improved Accuracy from Combined
Technology
A method for combining direction finding and time-of-arrival methods
has been developed to produce yet another lightning location method,
which we refer to as the IMPACT method. In this approach, direction
finding provides azimuth information, while absolute arrival time
provides range information. Azimuth and range information are
employed simultaneously in a generalization of the circular
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 341
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
intersection method, employing all available data, to obtain optimal
estimates of the CG discharge location. This approach does not suffer
from the problems inherent with the methods described in the previous
two sections when they are used separately.
As an example, a discharge that occurs between two sensors, along
their baseline, is precisely located by the intersection of the azimuth
vectors and range circles, as shown in Figure 204 below. In this figure,
the azimuth information for sensor S1 is the angle θ1, and the range
value (based on absolute arrival time) is r1. It is important to note that
in this example there are four measured parameters: two angles and
two arrival times. These measurements produce three estimated
parameters: latitude, longitude, and discharge time. Thus, the IMPACT
method has redundant information which allows for an optimized
estimate of location even in the minimal situation where a discharge is
detected by only two sensors. Evaluations of this method have shown
that this combined method outperforms either the direction-finding or
time-of-arrival method by itself, both in its location accuracy and in its
probability of detection.
r1
θ1
r2
S2
S1
θ2
Stroke
Position
Figure 204
IMPACT Method on a Baseline Between Two
Sensors
The IMPACT algorithm can utilize information from any combination
of direction finding (DF), TOA, or combined (DF/TOA) sensors.
Figure 205 on page 343 shows a typical lightning stroke in Florida that
was detected by five sensors in the U.S. National Lightning Detection
Network (NLDN)—three IMPACT and two LPATS (TOA) sensors.
The direction measurements are shown as straight-line vectors, and
range circles centered on each sensor represent the TOA
measurements.
342 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix F ____________________________________________ Introduction to Lightning Detection
Figure 205
IMPACT Method: 3 LPATS TOA, 2 IMPACT
Sensors
Stroke Peak Current
Once the location of a CG stroke is known, the peak magnetic field can
be used to estimate the stroke peak current. Since the peak magnetic
field at the stroke location is proportional to peak current (Uman et al.,
1975), and the propagation distance can be calculated from the stroke
location, it is possible to compute a range normalized signal strength
(RNSS) that is directly proportional to peak current. RNSS is the
measured signal normalized as if the lightning stroke had occurred
100 km from the sensor (Idone et al., 1993). For the National
Lightning Detection Network (NLDN), data are normalized using the
formula:
Range To Flash β
Range to Flash – 100 km
RNSS = Measured Signal ×  ----------------------------------------- ×exp -----------------------------------------------------------

100 km
λ
Where β and λ are empirically derived constants.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 343
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
The RNSS can be converted to kiloamperes using the formula:
kiloamperes = k 1 × RNSS
Where k1 has the value 0.185, derived experimentally.
This process is consistent with electromagnetic theory and a simple
transmission line model of how current propagates in the channel (see
Thottappillil and Uman, 1993). Its results are in good agreement with
measurements in Austria by Diendorfer et al. (2002), and in rocket
triggered lightning studies carried out at Camp Blanding, Florida.
VHF Detection
By detecting high-frequency radio emissions (VHF), it is possible to
reconstruct the geometry of the cloud discharge in two or three
dimensions using direction-finding or time-of-arrival (TOA) location
methods as discussed in the following sections. In these VHF lightning
mapping systems, the focus is on detailed discharge structure, but the
information about polarity, charge, and current magnitude is lost. VHF
location methods offer advantages, both for early warnings and for
research, particularly in local regions, and for those phases of the
discharge that occur within the cloud. The VHF systems also have the
ability to provide a large amount of information about the initial
occurrence of lightning and the evolution, intensity, and configuration
of the overall storm.
Direction Finding Based on VHF
Interferometry
A radio frequency interferometer measures the azimuth and
(optionally) elevation angles of lightning sources at VHF frequencies.
An interferometer uses differential phase in a narrow bandwidth
between closely spaced antennas to determine azimuth/elevation, and
then employs direction finding to determine the location of individual
lightning emissions (sources) (Hayenga et al., 1981; Rhodes et al.,
1994; Shao et al., 1995).
Multiple-station networks of interferometers have been developed by
Vaisala to locate and map the sources of VHF radiation (both cloud and
CG flashes) in two- or three-dimensions with high time resolution (see
344 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix F ____________________________________________ Introduction to Lightning Detection
Richard et al., 1988 and 1989). As with LF/VLF direction finding, the
location accuracy of these systems is dependent on sensor spacing.
Both 2D and 3D location of sources can be obtained by triangulation
among angular directions given by different stations (see Figure 206 on
page 345).
Figure 206
Triangulation for Interferometric Location
Wide Baseline TOA Methods
Operating at VHF
When the difference in the time-of-arrival of an RF emission is
measured at four widely spaced (several kilometers) stations that are
precisely synchronized, the location of the source can be determined in
three dimensions (Proctor, 1971). This location method is a direct
extension of the two-dimension hyperbolic intersection method that
was discussed in section Basic Time-of-Arrival on page 339. When
five or more sensors report an event, the time-of-arrival algorithm can
produce an optimized solution.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 345
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
The NASA Kennedy Space Center developed the first real-time
operational of a system of this type, called Lightning Detection and
Ranging (LDAR). The LDAR system is capable of providing threedimensional locations of more than a thousand RF pulses within each
lightning flash (Lennon et al., 1991 and Maier et al., 1995). In this
system the data acquisition is automatic, and the data displays are
generated in real-time.
VHF Signal Strength
Signal strength for VHF sensor networks is measured in range
normalized power (RNP) and the units are in dBm.
Lightning Location System Performance
There are several factors that characterize the performance of lightning
detection systems:
- Classification (cloud, CG)
- Location accuracy
- Detection efficiency.
- False alarms
This section deals with location accuracy and detection efficiency. The
specific values of these performance characteristics differ depending
on which location technique is used, but the characteristics themselves
apply to all techniques.
Measurement of Location Accuracy
A 2D confidence ellipse (or ellipsoid in three dimensions) can be used
to characterize the accuracy of the calculated stroke positions. The
median ellipse circumscribes a region, centered on the computed
(optimum) stroke location, within which there is a 50% probability that
the stroke occurred. The confidence ellipse can be described in terms
of its semi-major axis, its eccentricity (ratio of the semi-major axis to
the semi-minor axis), and the orientation of the semi-major axis (in
degrees relative to north). Example confidence ellipses are illustrated
in Figure 207 on page 347 and Figure 208 on page 347, along with all
the parameters that describe them. If a stroke is detected by only two
346 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix F ____________________________________________ Introduction to Lightning Detection
direction finders at a great distance from the stroke (see Figure 207),
the ellipse is quite eccentric, with its major axis oriented on a line
between the two sensors. If a stroke is detected by several sensors at
various angles, the ellipse tends to be smaller and more circular (see
Figure 208 on page 347).
Stroke Location
θ
S1
S2
Figure 207
Semi-major Axis:
Semi-minor Axis:
Eccentricity:
Angle (θ):
6.0km
0.8km
7.5
90°
Semi-minor
Axis
Semi-major
Axis
Confidence Ellipse: Unfavorable Sensor Geometry
S2
S1
S3
Figure 208
Semi-major Axis:
Semi-minor Axis:
Eccentricity:
Angle:
1.0km
0.5km
2.0
0°
Confidence Ellipse: Favorable Sensor Geometry
The confidence ellipse can be calculated for probabilities other than
50% by scaling the semi-major and semi-minor axes appropriately.
Table 51 below shows the scaling constant that would be multiplied by
the 50% probability ellipse axis lengths to obtain higher-probability
axes.
Table 51
The Scaling Constant and Probability Relationship
Scaling Constant
1
1.82
2.57
Probability
50%
90%
99%
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 347
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
The following equation can be used to calculate the scaling constant
for any desired probability level.
– 2 ⋅ ln ( 1 – Probability )
Scaling Constant = -----------------------------------------------------------1.177
In this equation probability is expressed as a fraction rather than as a
percent (for example: 0.9 rather than 90%).
It should be noted that not all locations within a confidence ellipse are
equally likely. The central point is the most likely, and the probability
decreases quickly as the position gets further from the central point.
Data Consistency
The reduced chi-square is computed for all optimized location
calculations. The reduced chi-square value is a measure of how well
the sensor measurements agree and is given by the following equation:
n
( m j – m j∗ ) 2
 --------------------------e j2
j=1
RCS = -------------------------------------------x
Where:
n
j
mj
mj*
ej
=
=
=
=
=
x
=
Total number of measurements
Measurement index
Measured value (angle or time)
Calculated value based on optimum location
Theoretical measurement error (standard deviation for
angle or time error)
Degrees of freedom (number of measurements minus the
number of estimated parameters)
Good values of chi-square fall in the range of 0.0 to 3.0 while
acceptable values are in the 3.0 to 10.0 range. Larger values are the
result of poorly calibrated sensors, unusual noise, or miscorrelations in
time, and these locations should be regarded as outliers.
Measurement errors can usually be kept to under 1° azimuth (angle
errors) and 1.5µs (time errors).
348 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix F ____________________________________________ Introduction to Lightning Detection
Detection Efficiency
Not all lightning discharges are detected and reported. Discharges are
not reported if the signal fails to meet various consistency checks or if
it falls below the sensor threshold. Locations are not calculated if the
discharge reported by multiple sensors cannot be correlated or if they
produce inconsistent locations. An entire flash is missed when none of
its discharges is detected or located. The ability of a network to detect
and report lightning discharges (cloud or cloud-to-ground) is referred
to as the network detection efficiency, which is computed as the
percentage of actual discharges that are reported by the network.
Network detection efficiency can be computed for CG flashes, strokes,
and cloud discharges. Network detection efficiency varies from region
to region.
Use of Location Quality Indicators
Location quality indicators can be used to understand individual stroke
location accuracy, as follows. First, it must be verified that the chisquare value is in the acceptable range (normally 10.0 or less). If this
value is larger than 10.0, then the ellipse parameters will underestimate
the actual location error. If the chi-square value is acceptable, then the
ellipse parameters can be used to evaluate the uncertainty in the
location of the stroke. When investigating an incident where there is a
question as to whether a particular stroke could have struck a specific
object, then orientation and shape of the ellipse can be used to answer
this question, as is illustrated in Figure 209 on page 350.
For this application, either the 90% or 99% confidence ellipse is
appropriate (depending on your desired level of confidence). The
confidence ellipses in Figure 209 are at the 90% probability level,
indicating that there is only a 10% chance that the stroke occurred
anywhere outside the ellipse. In this figure, the estimated stroke
location (centroid) for Stroke #1 is closer to the transmission line.
Without the confidence ellipse information, Stroke #1 might be
assumed to have struck the line. However, since the location
uncertainty is much less for Stroke #1, it is less likely that this event
struck the line because its confidence ellipse does not overlap the line.
Stroke #2 has a higher probability of having struck the line.
A detailed treatment of the problem of correlating lightning with other
events/incidents is a complex subject, and is beyond the scope of this
document. As a general statement, the greater the uncertainty in the
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 349
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
time of the event/incident, the more one must rely on the confidence
ellipse information to select between "candidate" lightning events.
Transmission
Line
15 km
Stroke #1
Stroke #2
Figure 209
Using Confidence Ellipse to Identify Most Likely
Stroke
Additionally, the confidence ellipse information is to determine the
regional location accuracy. In this case, only the semi-major axis is
important, as it is the parameter that reflects the worst-case orientation.
It is reasonable to employ the 50% probability value for this use, in
order to represent typical (median) location accuracy.
References
Cummins, K.L., Murphy, M.J., Bardo, E.A., Hiscox, W.L., Pyle, R.B.,
Pifer, A.E. (1998) A Combined TOA/MDF Technology Upgrade of the
U.S. National Lightning Detection Network, Journal of Geophysical
Research, Vol. 103, No. D8, 9035–9044.
Cummins, K.L., Krider, E.P., Malone, M. D., (1998), The U.S.National
Lightning Detection Network and Applications of Cloud-to-Ground
Lightning Data by Electric Power Utilities, IEEE Transactionson
Electromagnetic Compatibility, Vol. 40, No. 4, November.
Cummins, L, L., and Murphy, M. J., (2000), Overview of Lightning
Detection in the VLF, LF, and VHF Frequency range, 2000 Intl.
Lightning Detection Conf., Tucson, AZ, Global Atmospherics, Inc.
Diendorfer, G., Hadrian, W., Hofbauer, F., Mair, M., Schulz, W., (2002)
Evaluation of Lightning Location Data Employing Measurements of
Direct Strikes to a Radio Tower, CIGRE Session No. 39, Paper # 33206, Paris.
350 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix F ____________________________________________ Introduction to Lightning Detection
Hayenga, C.O. and Warwick, J.W. (1981) Two-dimensional
Interferometric Positions of VHF Lightning Sources, Journal of
Geophysical Research, (86), (pp. 7451–7462).
Horner, F. (1957) Very-Low-Frequency Propagation and Direction
Finding, Proceedings of the IEEE, 101B, 73–80.
Idone, V.P., Saljoughy, A.B., Henderson, R.W., Moore, P.K., Pyle,
R.B.(1993) A Reexamination of the Peak Current Calibration of the
National Lightning Detection Network, Journal of Geophysical
Research, Vol. 98, No. 10, 18,323–18,332.
Krider, E. P., Noggle, R. C., and Uman, M. A. (1976) A gated
wideband magnetic direction-finder for lightning return strokes, J.
Appl. Meteor., vol. 15, (pp. 301–306).
Krider, E. P., Noggle, R. C., Pifer, A. E., and Vance, D. L.(1980)
Lightning direction finding systems for forest fire detection, Bulletin of
the American Meteor. Soc., vol. 61, (pp. 980–986).
Lennon, C. and Maier, L. (1991) Lightning mapping system, in Proc.
Int. Aerospace and Ground Conf. on Lightning and Static Electricity,
Cocoa Beach, FL,. NASA Conf. Pub. 3106, Vol. II, (pp. 89-1–89-10).
Lewis, E.A., Harvey, R.B., Rasmussen, J.E. (1960) Hyperbolic
Direction Finding with Sferics of Transatlantic Origin, Journal of
Geophysical Research, Vol. 63, No. 7, 1879–1905.
Lewis, E.A. (1964) Geometry and First-Order Error Statistics for
Three- and Four-Station Hyperbolic Fixes on a Spherical Earth,
Physical Sciences Research Papers, No. 29.
Maier, L., Lennon, C., Britt, T., and Schaefer, S. (1995) Lightning
Detection and Ranging (LDAR) system performance analysis, Paper
8.9 in Proc. 6th Conf. on Aviation Weather Systems, Dallas, TX, Amer.
Meteorol. Soc.
Malan, D.J. (1963) Physics of Lightning, The English Universities
Press, Ltd., London, (176 pp.).
Murphy, M.J. and Cummins, K.L. (1998) 2-D and 3-D cloud discharge
detection, 1998 Intl. Lightning Detection Conf., Tucson, AZ, Global
Atmospherics, Inc.
Oetzel, G.N., Pierce, E.T. (1969) VHF Techniques for Locating
Lightning, Radio Science, 4, 199–201.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 351
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Orville, R.E. (1994) Cloud-to-Ground Lightning Flash Characteristics
in the Contiguous United States: 1989-1991, Journal of Geophysical
Research, Vol. 4, No. D5, 10,833–10,841.
Pierce, E.T. (1977) Atmospherics and radio noise, in Lightning, vol. 1:
Physics of Lightning, R.H. Golde, ed., (pp. 351–384).
Proctor, D.E. (1971) A Hyperbolic System for Obtaining VHF Radio
Pictures of Lightning, Journal of Geophysical Research, Vol. 76, (pp.
1478–1489).
Richard, P., Soulage, A., Laroche, P. and Appel, J. (1988), The SAFIR
lightning monitoring and warning system: Application to aerospace
activities, Proc. Int. Aerospace and Ground Conf. on Lightning and
Static Electricity, Oklahoma City, OK: National Interagency
Coordination Group, (pp. 383–390).
Richard, P., Soulage, A., and Broutet, F., (1989), The SAFIR lightning
warning system, Proc. 1989 Int. Conf. On Lightning and Static
Electricity, Bath, England: Ministry of Defence Procurement
Executive, (pp. 2B.1.1–2B.1.5).
Rison, W.R., Scott, R., Thomas, R.J., Krehbiel, P.R., Hamlin, T., and
Harlin, J. (1999) 3-dimensional lightning and dual-polarization
observations of thunderstorms in central New Mexico, 11th Intl. Conf.
on Atmos. Electricity, Guntersville, Ala., USA, NASA Conf. Publ.
1999-209261, (pp. 432–435).
Rhodes, C.T., Shao, X.M., Krehbiel, P.R., Thomas, R.J., and Hayenga,
C.O. (1994) Observations of Lightning Phenomena Using Radio
Interferometry, Journal of Geophysical Research, Vol. 99, (pp.
13,059–13,082).
Shao, XM., Krehbiel, P.R., Thomas, R.J., and Rison, W. (1995) Radio
Interferometric Observations of Cloud-to-ground Lightning
Phenomena in Florida, J. Geophys. Res., Vol. 100, (pp. 2749–2783).
Thottappillil, R., and Uman, M.A. (1993) Comparison of lightning
return-stroke models, Journal of Geophysical Research, Vol. 98, pp.
22903–22914.
Uman, M. A., McLain, D. K., and Krider, E. P. (1975), The
electromagnetic radiation from a finite antenna, Amer. J. Phys., Vol 43,
pp. 3–38.
Watson-Watt, R.A., and Herd, J. F. (1926) An instantaneous direct
reading radio goniometer, J. Inst. Elect. Engrs., vol. 64, pp. 611-622.
352 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix G ________________________________________________________________ Glossary
APPENDIX G
GLOSSARY
This glossary includes:
- Explanations of some general meteorological terms
- Explanations of some general technical terms
- Descriptions of TWX300 components and concepts
- Explanations of the terms used in TWX300 specifications
2D
Having to do with two dimensions. These dimensions are usually along the x
and y axes.
3D
Having to do with three dimensions. These dimensions are usually along the
x, y, and z axes.
AOC
Acronym for Area of Concern.
Alert
A triggered condition for Warning Areas.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 353
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
area of
concern
The areas selected for monitoring by TWX300.
archived data A repository of stored lightning data.
attenuation
To make finer, or lessen in density.
bulletin
A brief report or update issued for immediate or urgent broadcast. The
Bulletin may require immediate action by the recipient.
CG
Cloud-to-ground lightning.
CP
Central Processor.
CEN
Central Analyzer.
central
analyzer
Calculates locations of lightning events from sensor data and outputs the raw
and processed lightning data and sensor status information to a storage
device, printer, or display. The central analyzer, or processor, is the hardware
that processes the data received from the sensors. Central estimates peak
current of each stroke, its polarity, location, and other waveform features.
central
processor
Collects data from each sensor, compares the time the event was recorded by
each sensor (ensuring data applies to the same event), then computes the
precise location where CG lightning has occurred.
chi square
A statistical measure of how much deviation exists between sensor data in
calculating a lightning stroke location
cloud-toground
lightning
Can be either positive (+) or negative (-) in polarity. Referring to lightning
that originates usually in a cloud formation, then extends to earth (a
lightning flash occurring between a charge center in the cloud and the
ground). On an annual basis, negative charge is lowered to ground in about
95% of the flashes, the remaining flashes lowering positive charge to
ground. This type of lightning flash, which can be contrasted with an intracloud flash or cloud-to-cloud flash, consists of one or more return strokes.
The first stroke begins with a stepped leader followed by an intense return
stroke which is the principal source of luminosity and charge transfer.
Subsequent strokes begin with a dart leader followed by another return
stroke. Most of the strokes use the same channel to ground. The time interval
between strokes is typically 40 milliseconds.
354 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix G ________________________________________________________________ Glossary
configuration File that contains information that configures or informs your workstation
file
and systems about basic setup, preferences, paths, and so on.
data source
A device that creates and outputs data.
decay time
The time from when a signal reaches its Peak value, to when the signal
recrosses the Zero level.
EFM
Acronym for Electric Field Mill.
electric field
A static field of electrical energy. The greater the difference between the
electrical charge in a thunderstorm cloud and that of the ground below, the
greater is the potential for a lightning event.
The Electric Field Mill (EFM) measures the difference between the ground
level electric field and the above-ground electric field to estimate the
potential of a lightning strike.The electrical force exerted on a unit positive
charge placed at a given point in space. The electric field strength is
expressed, in the mks (meters/kilograms/seconds) system of electrical units,
in terms of volts per meter ((V/m)) and is a vector quantity. The electric field
strength of the atmosphere is commonly referred to as the atmospheric
electric field.
electric field
mill
Device used to measure the surrounding electric field. On a clear day,
electric field mill measurements normally range from +500 to -500 volts per
meter (V/m). In areas near thunderstorm activity, the electric field intensity
increases as the potential for lightning increases. Electric field
measurements of +/- 2000 V/m indicate a high potential for lightning.
equation
Combination of warning areas and EFM values used to trigger an event.
event
A lightning discharge. A short duration radiation pulse that is detectable by
means of a lightning detector/sensor.
flash
The entire cloud-to-ground electrical atmospheric discharge. A flash may
include one or more strokes and high current pulses called return strokes.
Duration of a flash is usually less than one second.
GIS
Acronym for Geographical Information System.
GMT
Acronym for Greenwich Mean Time. See also UTC.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 355
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
Geographical A system for efficiently creating, manipulating, analyzing, and displaying
Information
geographic or spatially referenced data.
System
Greenwich
Mean Time
Also known as Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
IC
Intra-cloud event.
IP address
Internet Protocol Address. This address, consisting of a combination of one
to three-digit numbers delimited by three periods, identifies the address of a
specific workstation so that data may be exchanged through the Internet.
Examples: 11.333.435.987 or 2.23.45.678. Each of the 6 numbers of an IP
address must be between 0 and 255.
intra-cloud
Referring to lightning occurring within cloud formations, or from one cloud
to the next. A lightning discharge occurring between a positively charged
region and a negatively charged region, both of which may lie in the same
cloud. The most frequent type of cloud discharge is one between a main
positive charged region and a main negative charged region. Cloud flashes
tend to outnumber cloud-to-ground flashes. In general, the channel of a
cloud flash will be wholly surrounded by cloud. Hence the channel's
luminosity typically produces a diffuse glow when seen from outside the
cloud and this widespread glow is called sheet lightning. Also called intracloud flash, and cloud-to-cloud flash.
LP
The LPxxxx (Lightning Processor xxxx) controls, manages and monitors a
lightning detection network. It evaluates, determines performance of
network sensors, processes lightning raw data, computes lightning positions,
and sends this data to client applications.
latitude
An angular measurement between imaginary circular lines on the earth's
surface (parallel to the equator) running east and west.
356 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix G ________________________________________________________________ Glossary
lat lon.
Latitude-Longitude. Lines of latitude extend in an east-west direction and
measure distance in degrees from 0 to +90 degrees and from 0 to -90. Lines
of longitude extend in a north-south direction and measure distance in
degrees from 0 to +179 and from 0 to -179 with 180° longitude being 1°
distance from +179° and 1° from -179°.
lightning
Briefly, an abrupt, discontinuous natural electric discharge in the
atmosphere. Lightning produces a sound wave that is heard as thunder. More
completely, lightning is a transient, high-current electric discharge whose
path length is measured in kilometers. Well over half of all lightning
discharges occur within the thunderstorm cloud and are called intra-cloud
discharges. The usual cloud-to-ground lightning, sometimes called streaked
or forked lightning, has been studied more extensively than other lightning
forms because of its practical interest, as the cause of injuries and death,
disturbances in power and communicating systems, and the ignition of forest
fires. Cloud-to-cloud and cloud-to-air discharges are less common than
intra-cloud or cloud-to-ground lightning. All discharges other than cloud-toground are often lumped together and called cloud discharges.
Positive and negative leaders are essential components of the lightning. Only
when a leader reaches the ground does the ground potential wave (return
stroke) affect the lightning process.
lightning
flash
The total observed lightning discharge generally has a duration less than one
second. A single flash is usually composed of many distinct luminous events
(strokes) that often occur in such rapid succession that the human eye cannot
resolve them.
lightning
stroke
In a cloud-to-ground discharge, a leader plus its subsequent return stroke. In
a typical case, a cloud-to-ground discharge is made up of three or four
successive lightning strokes, most following the same lightning channel.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 357
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
longitude
An angular measurement between imaginary circular lines (parallel to the
poles) on the earth's surface running north and south.
map layers
A geographic map is composed of many layers. Each layer adds more
information to the map. Layers can be visualized as stacked on top of each
other. The display of a layer shows one geographic feature and can be
controlled and manipulated.
map
projection
The projection of a spherical surface upon a flat surface. Mercator projection
is the most commonly used projection for Vaisala software products.
Mercator
projection
A map projection wherein the lines of latitude and longitude are straight and
parallel. While the lines of latitude are always equal distance from each
other on a globe, the lines of longitude become closer to each other as the
projection moves from the equator to the North or South. At 60 degrees
north or south, the horizontal distance between lines of longitude is half the
distance between longitude lines at the equator.
message
A short communication requiring no immediate action.
multiplicity
Multiplicity is shorthand for the number of strokes in a flash. Also called
stroke multiplicity.
NLDN
National Lightning Detection Network®.
National
Lightning
Detection
Network®
A network consisting of over 100 lightning detection sensors strategically
located throughout the contiguous United States. The NLDN provides both
real-time data and archived lightning information. Real-time lightning data
is provided on a subscription basis and broadcast using a satellite to forward
information from the Network Control Center located at the Vaisala office in
Tucson, Arizona.
node
A node, as applied to TWX300, is a representation on the Display of IC
lightning. With the node representing a point (dot on the Display), of origin.
ortho
Having to do with right angles. A two-dimensional representation of an
object using perpendicular lines.
perspective
Represents three-dimensional objects and depth associations on a twodimensional surface.
358 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
Appendix G ________________________________________________________________ Glossary
RAD
Acronym for Remote Alarm Display.
remote alarm
display
A three-color display device (green/yellow/red) used to display the status of
lightning threat as calculated by TWX300.
real-time data Lightning data that is received, filtered, and formatted as it occurs in nature.
The only time delay is due to the communication method and computation
time.
return stroke
The current pulses that transfer charge along highly luminous channels
between cloud and ground during a cloud-to-ground flash.
rise time
The time from when the lightning stroke reaches the enable threshold till the
time it reaches the peak.
SAFIR
Acronym for Surveillance et Alerte Foudre par Interferometrie
Radioelecrique (Lightning Monitoring and Warning using Radio
Interferometry) The SAFIR 3000-2 LF/VHF lightning sensor locates
lightning using the time-of-arrival method for LF sensing and the
interferometric method for VHF sensing.
SCM
SAFIR Central Module.
semi major
axis
A statistical measure of how much deviation exists between sensor data in
calculating a lightning stroke location
sensor
Any kind of lightning detector, for example, IMPACT, LPATS, SAFIR,
LDAR. Lightning detectors may detect lightning by measuring direction,
timing, signal strength, or some combination thereof.
threshold
A point (baseline) separating two or more conditions that will produce a
given effect.
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 359
GUI Reference Guide _______________________________________________________________
time-stamp
The date and time applied to an event.
total lightning The entirety of lightning activity in a storm. Total lightning detection
involves detecting events, which are components of flashes. These
components include breakdown processes and return strokes. Total lightning
information may be represented to the user as 2D flash data.
UTC
Acronym for Universal Time Coordinated.
Universal
Time
Coordinated
A known standard, Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), also known as
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) or Zulu Time, is used by Thunderstorm
Warning System to time stamp incoming lightning data. Midnight (0000
UTC) starts the 24 hour clock at the zero meridian.
WA
Warning Area.
Warning Area A user-defined area of concern.
360 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
________________________________________________________________________________
INDEX
A
alarm conditions
creating
creating logical expressions
logical expressions
requirements
testing configuration
alarm equation
RADS
relay
testing
alert
current status
EFM
managing
status
warning area
anti-virus software
application launcher
alarm file viewer button
central data file converter button
central data file viewer button
configuration file viewer button
diagnostic replay button
EFM data file viewer button
main application button
archive
alarm
alarm text
central
density
EFM
files
area definition
Area Definition dialog box
area map
317
319
317
317
321
173
176
321
183
185
189
184
183
187
30
37
45
51
42
49
40
43
39
267
268
267
267
268
270
353
353
115
actions
changing
features
geoset
grid lines
map layers
map navigator
navigating
projection
scale bar
area of concern
ASCII output
configure
licensed region
verify
115
116
116
134
116
119
128
131
133
118
137
325
326
325
327
B
backing up files
backup directories
building a video
271
271
246
C
circular intersection
method
color keys
default
during replay
gradient
communications
central data
EFM data
enabled devices
status color
status detail
status messages
confidence ellipse
340
210, 310
209
315
210
281
281
282
289
287
287
288
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 361
GUI Reference Guide ______________________________________________________________
calculating
configuration file
determining current
locating
parameters
using multiple
configure
alert conditions
ASCII output
auto cycle zooms
central data connection
discharge type
EFM connection
email notification connection
email notification list
map layers
map legend colors
proportional fonts
RADS connection
RADS equation
relay connection
relay equation
relay state
video, for replay
VLDS server
zoom sequence
coordinates
center, display area
cursor position
event
creating logical expressions
346
273
278
273
273
277
187
326
218
282
192
283
286
290
119
108
264
284
175
285
178
180
235
329
215
195
195
197
196
319
D
data aging
309
setting time period length
314
time period length
309
data replay
233
default map legend colors
209
density mode
259
diagnostic replay
40
dialog box
alarms
66, 67, 173, 187
area definition
140, 155
build video
246
choose projection
134
create equation
175, 178
create order of predefined zooms
215
discharge types
193
display properties
125
EFM commands
168
email configuration
291
enter password
255
general configuration
82
geoset
135
inspector
100, 198, 208
label properties
127
layer control
120
map legend
103, 310
monitor
207
predefined views
213
predefined zooms
213, 218
query data
225
region style
154
replay
238
save image
221
test RADS and relays alarms
322
VLDS server configuration
329
zoom
214
discharge type
192
discharges mode
258
discrimination values
230
display mode
density
259
discharges
258
distance between objects
211
DMS option
99
document conventions
23
E
EFM
alert state
commands
configure connection
create alarm
graph
graph,navigating
status
email notification
adding an address
configure connection
removing an address
renaming an address
testing an address
time range
email notification list
configure
enabled devices
event
bearing
coordinates
date and time
distance
distance between
intensity
intensity using fonts (symbols)
most recent
164
167
283
189
165
166
163, 289
290
290
286
293
293
294
292
290
288, 289
199
196
198
199
211
201
202
204
362 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
________________________________________________________________________________
polarity
query
replay
total counts
206
225
233
207
F
files
alarm text, viewing
archive
archives
configuration
license
locating archive files
log, viewing
268
270
266
273
253
270
270
G
geoset
glossary
gradient
gradient colors
grid lines, map
134
353
210
210
116
H
help files
histogram, time lapse
hotkey replay
33
110
244
I
IC node breakdown
image files
automatic save
save manually
zoom synchronization
inconsistent event dates
information window
initiation points
inspector
inspector parameters
interface
application launcher
area map
desktop icon
main menu
status bar
toolbar
231
219
219
221
218
262
112
229
100, 208
101, 297
37
115
37
55
64
62
L
license
agreement
ASCII output region
data region
options
live replay
24
325
253
254
243
location accuracy
logical expressions
testing
346
317
321
M
main menu
map layers
defining layer properties
label properties
layer control
managing
managing layer properties
order
map legend
color keys
colors during replay
display modes
solid colors
map navigator
map projections
changing
commonly used
menu
file
help
replay
tools
view
messages
mode
selecting
monitor
multiple configuration files
multiplicity
55
119
125
127
120
122
122
123
103
209, 210, 310
315
104
209
128
133
134
301
55
61
60
58
56
113
260
109, 207
277
231
N
Next Font command
nodes
normalized signal strength
calculation
262
227
343
P
password protection
change password
enter password
protected functions
polarity
predefined zoom
adding
auto cycle
length of time displayed
removing
selecting a level
255
256
256
255
206
213
218
217
214
215
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 363
GUI Reference Guide ______________________________________________________________
sequence
synchronization
predefined zooms
printing
projection
mercator
regional equal area
US state plane
UTM
projections
commonly used
proportional fonts
215
218
213
212
302
303
307
305
133
301
202, 263
Q
query
date and time
discrimination values
IC node breakdown
intra-cloud lightning data
lightning data
multiplicity
specific data
225
230
231
227
225
231
226
R
RADS
alarm equation
configure connection
equation
RADS equation tab
testing
relay
alarm equation
configure connection
configure relay state
equation
state
testing
time range
trigger state
replay
building a video
colors
data aging
diagnostic
dialog box
hotkey
live
loading
saved video
speed
standard
types
replaying lightning data
171
173
284
175
173
321
176
285
180
178
180
321
181
179
246
315
315
40
239
244
243
242
241
240
238
233
233
S
safety considerations
general
scale bar
screen savers
semi major axis
semi-minor axis
sending EFM commands
software
copyright notice
data types supported
display tasks
legal notices
overview
processing tasks
technical support
using anti-virus software
using screen savers
version information
solid colors
standard replay
starting and stopping TWX
status bar
communications status
hotkey replay mode
lightning counts
replay mode
status detail
status messages
system
archives
ASCII output
backup directories
bulletins
communications
communications status detail
configutaion file
display modes
fonts
inconsistent event dates
license file
licensed data region
licensed options
password protection
PC clock adjustment
proportional fonts
status messages
UTC time
VLDS server
VLDS version
system bulletins
system fonts
23
118
30
359
346
169
30
29
29
31
27
29
33
30
30
30
209
238
54
64
287
65
207
64
287
288
266
325
271
257
281
287
273
258
262
262
253
253
254
255
261
263
288
261
328
331
257
262
364 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
________________________________________________________________________________
T
tab
Connections, configuration
Density, configuration
EFMs, alarms
Email equations, alarms
General, configuration
Identify, configuration
Others, configuration
RADS equation, alarms
Relay equations, alarms
Relay options, alarms
Warning areas, alarms
technical support
testing
alarm equations
email address
time
inconsistent event dates
PC clock adjustment
UTC
time lapse histogram
time range
email notification
relays
time-of-arrival
detection method
time-period length, setting
toolbar
total lightning counts
trademarks
translucent widows
trigger states
status
87
91
189
290
84
94
96
173
177
180
187
25, 33
322
294
262
261
261
110
292
181
337–341
314
62
207
24
113
create circular with coordinates
create circular without coordinates
create concentric
create with polygon
data limits
display multiple
enabling
modifying
properties
removing
renaming
styles
using
warranty
window
alerts status
EFM graph
EFM status
information
monitor
VLDS
141
143
148
151
191
155
155
156
160
159
160
153
137
25
184
165
164
112
109
328
X
XviD setup
235
Z
zoom
levels
predefined
sequence
213
213
215
179
U
UTC time
261
V
VHF radiation, associated with lightning
video
video configuration
viewing
archive files
system bulletins
VLDS server
335
241
235
270
257
328
W
warning area
combining
configure alert conditions
create circular manually
158
187
146
VAISALA ______________________________________________________________________ 365
GUI Reference Guide ______________________________________________________________
366 _________________________________________________________________ M210815EN-C
www.vaisala.com